Home
        Océ MP1020/25/35
         Contents
1.                                                                                                    Utility Counter  Admin  Man    Admin  2 Printer Set  Timeout  agement     ting     p  12 25  No Matching  Paper in Tray  Setting  Software SW   page 12 52   Ping   Security Enhance Se   Setting curity l  Unlock  SSL TLS   Delete Job 3  Memory Overwrite All  Manage  Data  ment      6  HDD Lock  Setting    Encryption  Setting   Format      Reports TX Report  RX Report  One Touch  List  Program Index List  List  Bulletin List      Confidential  List     Printer   MFP Set Proof Print  Setting    Hold Time  Overwrite  A4  lt   gt  Letter  Document  Hold Time  PostScript  Error Report                   12 10    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        Utility mode          Utility Counter       Printer Default Set    Basic    Tray       Setting       Paper Size       Original  Direction       Print Method         of Sets       Font    Font         Symbol Set       Number  Lines       Font Size       CR LF  Mapping       PDL Set       Test Print       Ceck Detail      Counter   p  11 6                             MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     12 11       12 Utility mode       12 2 Specifying User   s Choice settings    From the User   s Choice screens  the default settings  settings selected when  the machine is turned on  can be specified     The following procedure describes how to display the User   s Choice screens  and specify its settings     To specify User   s Choice settings    
2.                                                                               Print    Sob Print i Print Type it             User Name    riea JO    IEN 2rd Dest                      atesaki std  f      Me p  Free    70                  3 Check the printing order                                                                                                                                      2 24 17 20                    Jo  Pri                         Order         Touch     and       todisplaya t  Typ   different screen  No  03  Pe e Mode Revd TSI u    The printing order for a maximum   Hl Prt 777 Copy 28 88 Caroline   of 8 jobs can be displayed               777 Copy 98 34 Caroline  777 Copy 98734  og   15     3  35  777 Copy 98 34       Caroline          Caroline                   Job List PFA S Henory 704     Detail   A job being performed or a job waiting to be performed  such as a queued  job  can be deleted  For details  refer to  To delete a job  on page 5 25   In addition  the job can be deleted after the  Stop  key is pressed  For  details  refer to  Stopping deleting a job  on page 4 63        5 24 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Additional copy operations       To delete a job    A job being performed or a job waiting to be performed can be deleted     1 Touch  Job List      The Job List screen appears  j    T 5pmbine guant      Basics   fGraginals   Densi Application    x    Paper Zoom Duplex        Finishing   8  Sfna1      Job List  emery 100        2 Selec
3.                                               No  Part name Description   1 Print indicator Lights up or flashes to indicate the status of the  machine   2 Adjustable document guide Adjusted to the width of the document  See  page 4 9    3 Document feed tray Loaded with the documents to be scanned fac   ing up   4 Document output tray Collects documents that have been scanned   5 Document stopper Raised to prevent large sized documents from  falling out of the document output tray                MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5                                                                       Before making copies 3  Paper Feed Cabinet PC 102 PC 202 PC 402  MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  3 11       Before making copies       Paper Feed Cabinet PC 102 PC 202                      No  Part name Description  1 4th tray Used for storage when the single paper feed  cabinet is installed  Can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of paper  when the double paper feed cabinet is installed  2 3rd tray Can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of paper  3 Lower right side door release lever Used to open the lower right side door  4 Lower right side door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds                Paper Feed Cabinet PC 402       No  Part name    Description       5 Tray release button    Pressed in order to pull out the LCT             6 LCT          Can be loaded with up to 2 500 sheets of paper          MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies       Saddle Stitcher SD 502 Mailbin 
4.                                            aper   appears Basics   SPSEASE   SYALHY   Application  paper     app          Po   Buto nee A4D  S A4D      iii   PaA40  ee        o      Job List emery100       To replenish paper     gt  Check which paper tray appears highlighted in the touch panel  and  then load it with paper     Detail   For details on loading paper into the paper trays  refer to  Loading paper  into the 1st or 2nd tray  on page 3 54   Loading paper into the LCT  on  page 3 56  and  Loading paper into the bypass tray  on page 3 58        6 24 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Troubleshooting 6       6 4 When the message        Not enough remaining  memory     appears    This machine uses the memory to produce copies     Since the amount of memory available is  limited  the message  The job has been    deleted  Not enough remaining memory   Ce ee ee Laerication  appears and the scanned job is deleted if   Barer ae otha  the memory becomes full while scanning a ar    document     eip aos     Finishing 4 Original      Job List ree 0          MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  6 25    6 Troubleshooting       6 5 When the message    Please exchange toner     appears    When there is very little toner remaining  the message  Please exchange  toner   appears     Q    Detail  After the message  Please exchange toner   appears  about 500  A4   pages can be printed     When the message appears  prepare Re o co  to replace the toner bottle according to  sil  your maintenance ag
5.                                         Henery 100     Input User Name and Password to login   Select the domain from  Domain Name      User       Authentication       amn ee    Caroline               User Name    Domain Name     al inger    Henery 100        Password                               Henery 100     Input User Name and Password to login   Select the domain from  Domain Name      User  Authentication          sal   losin     Caroline                oi  xxxxeeeess      Domain Name 4 Salinger    Henery 100                       The User Authentication screen disappears  and the Basics screen  appears        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     3 43    3 Before making copies       Account Track         perg  100           Type in the account name  and then  touch  Enter        For details on specifying account    E   MEG                                     track settings  refer to ARDEA    Specifying account data MRIMEN MEIC   settings  on page 12 34  sate   J  ipa   Gans        Account Track                  perg  100        Type in the password  and then  touch  Enter            ISM RIL SIMI  SI 2   aes es  a  SPACE mS                                  3 44 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies       Press the  Access  key     If the account name or password  was incorrectly entered  the input  screen appears again  Type in the  correct account name and  password  and then press the   Access  key        Access  Cire    O             The Account Track scr
6.                      SS    n a       DCE       al    HL  hd  RA    A CAUTION  ANVORSICHT  A ATTENTION  A PRECAUCI  N  A ATTENZIONE  ACUIDADO  At E  AF g   DSA                                                                                                                                                          __Avcaurion_J _Avorsicur_ _varrention    Averecaucion   A cumaoo   Aamen     a an aan A a    A Hide Obertiche    Temp  rature seve  emperava atar   ata temperaturat   ana temperare   meva   ma    wa  aer Je    A CAUTION  A CAUTION The area around the    fusing unit is extremely  hot  Touching any part    The area is extremely    hot  Touching any part other than those    indicated may result in  burns     other than those  indicated may result in  burns                 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  2 21       2 Installation and operation precautions       2 5 Space requirements    To ensure that machine operation  consumables replenishing  part  replacement  and regular maintenance can easily be performed  adhere to  the recommended space requirements detailed below                                                                                                                                                                 1537 1138  119   1206 212 328 710 100    a  3    2     re  2 g St        oe ae i LI   422 616       Unit  mm              amp     Reminder  Be sure to allow a clearance of 100 mm  4 inch  or more at the back of  this machine for the ventilation duct  
7.                    Henery 100     Go    Touch  Yes   touch  Enter   and then touch  Enter  in the next screen  that appears     Account Authentication screen   touch  Enter  in each screen until a ae  the Basics screen appears   The screen for selecting an account  number appears again   The account is deleted        Delete  Account                Herer 100        12 40 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode 12       Allowing printing without authentication    Display the Administrator Management 1 screen  and then touch    Account User Auth        For details on displaying the Administrator Management 1 screen   refer to  Displaying the Administrator Management screen  on  page 12 25    The Account Authentication screen appears     Touch  Allow Print without  eee                           Authentication   TEETE  The Allow Print without  Authentication screen appears  User Authentication   ON OFF j ON  Touch  ON   and then touch  Enter   Select whether to allow printing  when User Account is not specified          If  ON  is selected  printing is Uti lity C  possible regardless of whether ance  J Enter   an account is specified      If  OFF  is selected  a document  cannot be printed if no account is  specified        To cancel changes to the  settings  touch  Cancel      The Account Authentication screen appears again                    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  12 41    12 Utility mode       12 9 Specifying user authentication settings    User authentication can 
8.                    eel       MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  3 47    3 Before making copies    y  5    tI                 Password       Henery 100          l Type in the password  and then  touch  Enter   ERXEEEERE       BeWEBDwUOOE8  ASDMOGVHAWIEC  MOMENI   SPACE j EE     ions  ss   E        Ifthe user name or password was   R  thentication  incorrectly entered  the input    screen appears again  Type in the  correct user name and password   and then touch  Login                                        OOOO REREKEREEE            Password              Henery 100          Instead of touching  Login   press the  Access  key to complete the    operation   The User Authentication screen disappears  and the Basics screen  appears    Touch  Account Name   APEUBSSESYa ee Sgin     Account Track       Password          perg  100        3 48 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies       Type in the account name  and then  touch  Enter      For details on specifying account  track settings  refer to   Specifying account data  settings  on page 12 34     Touch  Password      Type in the password  and then  touch  Enter      Press the  Access  key     If the account name or password  was incorrectly entered  the input  screen appears again  Type in the  correct account name and  password  and then press the   Access  key        Account  Na       EOREanooooe       ASOREHOUNH  JASE                               ipha  Cavs   Henery 100     Input Account  Na  and Password to login
9.                 the paper  an naaa aaa ii  peP Basics Grisinais  bensiey   Application     Make sure that  X  is selected    Paper Zoon Bangle  and then use the keypad to type   custom size  cancel   Enter         in the length of side X  between          140 mm and 432 mm   Er TOR     Touch  Y  to select it  and then a r    use the keypad to type in the BEE ears  length of side Y  between 90 mm kisi acai  and 297 mm        A value outside the allowable range cannot be entered     To change the entered value  press the  C   clear  key  and then  enter the correct value     Can paper sizes be stored      gt  Two specified non standard paper sizes can be stored  For details   refer to  To store a non standard paper size  Custom Size settings    on page 8 13      gt  To recall a stored paper size  touch  1  or  2      Touch  Enter      The Paper screen appears again   A non standard paper size is specified        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Copy paper original documents 8       To store a non standard paper size  Custom Size settings    Two non standard paper sizes for the bypass tray can be stored    Storing paper sizes that are used often allows the paper size to be quickly  selected  without having to re enter the setting    1 In the Basics screen  touch  Paper   E o co    The Paper screen appears   Basics   origeasts   SAuY   Application    Zoon Duplex     000    pe spe    Mixed     Finishing 4   Original      Job List rea      100             Select the button for the 
10.               00  1 22     Width    and    Length    assisia iiaa 1 22  Paper Orientation iiiter Mili Adee tea eed eed 1 22  1 7 Legal restrictions ON COPYING             cceseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeseeneeeeeenenneeeees 1 23       2 1 Safety information       ssssssesnnsnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn nnn 2 3  Warning and precaution symbols       sessssssseeereeerressrrssrrrerrrrerrnsernesns 2 3  Meaning of SYMDOIS     ccccssescciesseaseedheveseauecessssacncgesestecuencauessncganeevs 2 4  Disassemble and MOGIfICATION           eeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeaeeteeneeeeeeeees 2 4  Power COMA aaaea aa eaea a Naa e EE aA aan a da deshsaaseb begets Oe 2 5  POWEF SOUICG ssisiiposisaiiiisnadapin parara inaa AA On RREA EAE TEn An ia sharida iai 2 6  POWER PIUG    an a ak eves cies ives lah aa a aea aeae a otis aaaea 2 7  GOUNGING nsii ina a a a 2 7  Installati   Miaa anair aca and ataei 2 8  Ventilation  scienna a aia aE TEN indies 2 9  Actions in response to troubles                   sssssssscseceeeeeeeeeeeeeesesseseess 2 9  When moving the machine              ccccccceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 2 10  Before successive holidays             ccccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeennneeters 2 11   2 2 User instructions         ccsecssseeessneneseeeessneeeeneeessenensseeeeensnenenseneeneeeeees 2 12  CE Marking  Declaration of Conformity  for users of the  European Union  EU              ccccceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeessneeeeeens 2 12  For users in countr
11.               If the punch unit is installed  pull  out the hole punch waste    container     Lower lever FN3  and then remove  any paper     5       MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     10 16    Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers 1 0       6 Return levers FN1 and FNS to their original positions         Ifthe punch unit is installed  insert the hole punch waste container  into its original position                 7 Lower lever FN4   8 Turn dial FN5 or dial FN6  and then    pull out any paper                 9 Return lever FN4 to its original position        10 Turn the dial to the left to move the  stapler toward the front                       MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  10 17    1 0 Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers       11 Push up the staple cartridge holder   and then remove it toward you              d A    12 Raise the shutter of the staple  cartridge holder  and then pull out  one sheet of staples                    13  Return the shutter to its original position     14 Insertthe staple cartridge holder until  it locks into place                 15 Close the front door      amp     Reminder  If stapling still cannot be resumed  even after performing the above  procedure  contact your technical representative        10 18 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers 1 0       To clear jammed staples in the saddle stitcher       I       O
12.             ecccesssseetesseseeeeeeeeees 6 32    tions    SPOCHICATIONS  29 2  22  ces  assace cane sesecceeneccnnectecctcontetecsesecsctecstsnseeceasesceauaees 7 3   Oo  oE EEE cach elaseed nasa lteheees ii leet attic ETE 7 3  Automatic Duplex Unit          eee cceeessceeeseeeeseeeeseseeeeseeeeeeseeeenseneenesens 7 5  Reverse Automatic Document Feeder DF 605              2     ceeeeeeeee 7 5  Paper Feed Cabinet PC 102            cececcccecessencceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeaee 7 7  Paper Feed Cabinet PC 202   0       ceeccseceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaee 7 7  Paper Feed Cabinet PC 402            eeccccceeceeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeaee 7 7  Finisher FS 508 wich bala ett ate eee ae 7 8  Punch  Unit PUSO T it covet el eae ee ae ee hd 7 8  Saddle Stitcher SD 502 0 0    eeeeeseeceeeeeceeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseneeeeeeeseeneeeees 7 9  Output  Tray OT 604 ceive  aeea neame aa eee naat anaa a iiaa Rana 7 9  Mailbin  Kit MT 50 f anasinin een iia 7 9  Job Separator JS 502 nacon eaaa e ae eaaa aea e aai 7 10   COpy  pa OE r arare aa aaa a a aandaa aaa A aaan Aaa EKAA a Faad aeina En 8 3  Possibl   paper sizes e a ee a aay 8 3  Paper types and paper Capacities               ccecceeeeeeneeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeaee 8 5  Special paper mo nsn Seer aate akadan erada hates te a a la karea 8 6  Precautions for paper            cccecceeceesseeceeeeeeneeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseaaeeeeeeeeaaee 8 8  Paper Stor  ger na onnaa Se aa eee ee 8 8  Automatic paper tray switching feature               cccceeeee
13.            0000000  Do not change these  bits when specifying  settings for this func   tion              Q    Detail    The information for the LDAP server to be connected to must be  registered in order to use the LDAP server  In addition  when LDAP and  user authentication is synchronized  select  Active Directory  as the user  authentication method  Select  GSS SPNEGO  as the LDAP  authentication method  For details on the user authentication method   refer to  To register a user with external server authentication  on   page 12 44  For details on the LDAP authentication method  refer to the  User manual  Network Scanner Operations         12 62    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode    12       Specifying whether to enable access locks and password rules  and  specifying the method for deleting image data  mode 469     Specify whether to lock access if the password is entered incorrectly  specify  whether to apply the password rules  and specify the method for deleting    image data     Settings at the time of purchase       Bit    76543210       Setting          00000000  HEX  00           Specifying the settings    The grayed out cells are the settings at the time of purchase                                            Bit Description Setting Description   7 Specify whether to 0 Does not lock access  lock access when a  password  account 1 Locks access  track and administra   tor passwords  is en   tered incorrectly three  times    6 Specify whether or 0 Image
14.           The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional original cover                      installed   No  Part name Description  1 Control panel Used to specify the various settings and per   form operations such as starting copying  2  Power   auxiliary power  key Press to turn on and off machine operations  for  example  for copying  printing or scanning   When turned off  the machine enters a state  where it conserves energy   3 Automatic duplex unit door release Used to open the automatic duplex unit door  lever  4 Automatic duplex unit door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within  the automatic duplex unit  5 Release lever for main unit right side   Used to open the right side door of the main unit  door                      3 6    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies          No     Part name    Description       Multiple bypass tray    Used when printing onto paper with a size not  loaded into a paper tray or onto thick paper   overhead projector transparencies  postcards   envelopes or label sheets   Can be loaded with up to 150 sheets of plain pa   per  50 overhead projector transparencies   postcards  label sheets or sheets of thick paper   or 10 envelopes   Referred to as the  bypass tray  throughout the  manual   See page 3 58        Tray extension    Pull out when large sized paper is to be loaded        Adjustable document guides    Adjust to the width of the paper        Paper stopper    Prevents printed pages from falling o
15.          ccccsssseeeessssseeeeeeessseeeeeeeseseeeeeeesseees 4 25  Automatically selecting the paper size      Auto Paper Select    Setting              cc ceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeteee 4 26  Manually selecting the desired paper SiZe                 ccceeeeeeereeees 4 27       Contents 4 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5           4 6 Specifying a ZOOM setting       ss sssensssunsennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnna 4 28  Automatically selecting the zoom ratio     Auto Zoom    setting       4 29  Specifying the same zoom ratio as the document   CXT OZ SettinNg  aoine a a ea han ha ee ed Ge 4 29  Slightly reducing the copy     Minimal    setting            eeeeeeeeeeee 4 31  Finely adjusting the ZOOM ratio            ccccccceceeeeeeeneeeeeeteeneeeeeeeeeaee 4 32  Selecting a preset zoom ratio  Enlarge and Reduce settings        4 33  Typing in the ZOOM ratio            cceeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaes 4 34  Specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios   Individual ZOOM settings              ceccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeneeeeeeteeeeeees 4 35  Selecting a Stored ZOOM ratio   0 00    eee eeeseeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeees 4 37  Storing the desired ZOOM ratio    eeeeeesseeeeeneeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 4 38   4 7 Selecting single  double sided settings for   originals and COPIES            s eeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseseeneneeeseeeeneees 4 40  To select single sided copies              cccceeeseceeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeee
16.         Hole Punch     Crease      Henery 100           4 54    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation 4       Separating copies by pages     Group    setting     Y The factory default setting is  Non Sort      Y lf  Group  is selected while no finisher is installed  printed copies will be  fed out and grouped in an alternating crisscross pattern if the following  conditions are met      A4 or B5 paper is used      Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the Ga orientation in one  paper tray and with the     orientation in another tray      The  Auto Paper Select  setting is selected      The  Mixed Original  setting is not selected     If  Group  is selected and the finisher is installed  copies are fed out  shifted to separate them     1 In the Basics screen  touch Re o co   Finishing   ee      Basics  originals  Obesity   Application    The Finishing screen appears     Paper Zoon Bupa    PEipiching   Mixed     Finishing 4   Original         Job List       2 Touch  Group   Ready to copy             Non Sor t            Hole Punch     Crease     eon        Job List Memory 100                 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  4 55    Basic copy operation       Stapling copies  staple settings     Q    Detail   In order for copies to be stapled  all of the following conditions must be  met      The paper width must be between 182 mm and 297 mm      The paper length must be between 140 mm and 432 mm      If the  Mixed Original  setting is selected  all copies 
17.         Shift grouping Finisher            Crisscross grouping                 Corner Staple Finisher  2 Staples Finisher  Center binding Finisher and saddle stitcher      Crease  and  2  Staples  settings        Hole Punch Finisher and punch unit                  Crisscross sorting and crisscross grouping are not available if a finisher is installed     The following procedures describe how to select Finishing settings        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  4 53    Basic copy operation       Separating copies by sets     Sort    setting     V The factory default setting is  Non Sort      Vv    N    If  Sort  is selected while no finisher is installed  printed copies will be fed  out and sorted in an alternating crisscross pattern if the following  conditions are met      A4 or B5 paper is used      Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the Ga orientation in one  paper tray and with the     orientation in another tray      The  Auto Paper Select  setting is selected      The  Mixed Original  setting is not selected      The  Cover Mode  and  Insert Sheet  functions are not set      The  Image Repeat  function is not set     If  Sort  is selected and the finisher is installed  copies are fed out shifted  to separate them     In the Basics screen  touch   Finishing      game ouau f Application      Basics  Originais f Densi    The Finishing screen appears     Paper Zoom Duplex       a eee  Finishing     Originar         Job List        Touch  Sort   Ready to copy        
18.         weer    100                  fxxxxxxaxx        iz  s Ez   POMAANMUnoOA  ASIDIARHWHC  AKEKENMAJ  CE G    Alpha     Caps   21004                                  Access    C      i             The Account Track screen disappears  and the Basics screen appears     Make copies using the desired copy settings        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     3 Before making copies          When you are finished printing  press  the  Access  key     A message appears  requesting Access    requesti  confirmation to log off   C      O             The User Authentication screen  appears                   Yes    User Name   Caroline  Account Name   0001          Honor 100     Q    Detail   Machine authentication and account track settings can be specified in  Aaministrator mode  available from the Utility mode  Settings should be  specitied by the administrator        3 50 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies 3       Controlling machine use with user authentication  machine  authentication  and account track synchronized    If machine authentication settings have been specified with user  authentication  the settings can be synchronized with the account track  settings     Users can log on from the User Authentication screen     Y Contact your administrator for passwords     Yy A maximum of 100 users can be registered with machine authentication   and a maximum of 1 000 account names can be registered     Touch  User Name      Input User Name and Password to login     Us
19.        Swing up the document guide lever                       4 Turn the dial to feed out any misfed  documents                       MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  6 7    Troubleshooting            J           Q    Detail  For details on the positions of paper misfeeds  refer to  Paper misfeed  indications  on page 6 6     While supporting the document feed  tray with your right hand  carefully  pull out any misfed documents                 Return the document guide lever to its original position  and then close    the misfeed clearing cover        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Troubleshooting 6       To clear a paper misfeed in the fusing unit       Pull up the right side door release  lever  and then open the right side  door                         A CAUTION    The area around the fusing unit is extremely hot     Touching any part other than those indicated may result in  AN burns  If you get burnt  immediately cool the skin under cold    water  and then seek professional medical attention     Fusing                      Carefully pull out any misfed paper                          MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  6 9    6 Troubleshooting           Decreased copy quality may  result if the surface of the image A w transfer  transfer roller is touched  Be ENING roller  careful not to touch the surface of ia  the image transfer roller                       3 Open the fusing unit guide              A    Carefully remove any misfed paper                 5 Open the switching gu
20.        ssssssnunnnsnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmn 3 3   Ootte  EPEA TEE T EEE TE 3 3  Outside Of MACHING sssini iiser eaaa aaa i eaa 3 6  Inside back of main UNit          eee eee ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaaee 3 8  Reverse Automatic Document Feeder DF 605            2      eeeeeeee 3 10  Paper Feed Cabinet PC 102 PC 202 PC 402           cccseeeeeeeeeeee 3 11  Saddle Stitcher SD 502 Mailbin Kit MT 501           eeeceeeeeeeeeteeeeee 3 13  Finisher FS 508 Output Tray OT 601 Punch Unit PU 501            3 14  Control panelicscwieretsa dao e ie ate ee ea eR Seed 3 16  Basic settings screen  Basics screen             ccceeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 19  Icons that appear in the Screen 0 0    eeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeeaeeess 3 20  Enlarging the touch panel SCreeNns             e cceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeee 3 21  3 2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel                 cccssseeeeeeeeseneees 3 22  To adjust the angle of the control panel            2     ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 3 22  3 3 Turning on the main power and the auxiliary powet                3 24  To turn On the machine              ccceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaee  To scan during warm up  To turn off the MACHING              ccceseeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeees  Automatically returning to the default settings   Automatic panel reset           ccccccccccccccccceeesesessessessssseaeeseeeeeeeeeeeess 3 29  Automatically returning to the screen given priority    s es 3
21.       2 22 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Installation and operation precautions 2       2 6 Operation precautions    To ensure the optimum performance of this machine  observe the  precautions described below     Power source    The power source requirements are as follows    e Voltage fluctuation  Maximum  10   at 220 240 V AC    e Frequency fluctuation  Maximum  2 5 Hz  at 50 Hz        Use a power source with as little voltage or frequency fluctuations as  possible     Operating environment    The environmental requirements for correct operation of the machine are as   follows    e Temperature  10  C  50  F  to 32  C  89 6  F  with fluctuations of no more  than 10  C  18  F  within an hour   e Humidity  15  to 85  with fluctuations of no more than 20  within an  hour   e However  in an environment with a temperature of 32  C  89 6  F    maintain a relative humidity of 65  or less     Storage of copies    To store copies  follow the recommendation listed below    e Copies that are to be kept for a long time should be kept where they are  not exposed to light in order to prevent them from fading    e Adhesive that contains solvent  e g   spray glue  may dissolve the toner  on copies    e Color copies have a thicker layer of toner than normal black and white  copies  Therefore  when a color copy is folded  the toner at the fold may  peel off        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  2 23    2 Installation and operation precautions          2 24 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5      
22.       LL                4 Touch the button for the program number registered with the desired  copy settings   The program copy settings are recalled  and the Basics screen appears  again         If  Enter  is touched without touching a program number button  the  Basics screen appears again and no copy program is recalled     5 Press the  Start  key   Copying begins with the recalled copy settings        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  5 11    Additional copy operations       To checking the copy settings    The copy settings to be registered as a copy program can be checked        1 Press the  Mode Memory  key   The Program screen appears  Mode Memory    we                2 Touch  Check   Select RECALL  INPUT  DELETE or CHECK   then press the appropriate job   key                       Program  Save Recall Job Settings  EIB Lemos ET                 Recall   Set   Delete     mah  10   we    Henery 100                       3 Touch the program number button Check Program 1 3  1    registered with the copy settings to  be checked   a  Buber  x0  707    The Check Program screen appears     Finishing 1 gt  2    Text  amp   photo Sort    Auto  Density       Quality    p  Density 2in1    Job List  rae Y 100     Auto       4 Check the copy settings registered with the selected program number     The program whose copy settings are being checked in the Check  Program screen can be recalled  Touch  Recall  to recall the  registered copy settings and display the Basics screen again   5 
23.       Touch  Counter  to display the  Counter screen  which contains Counter screen  the counters for the selected  account     RPiowance   000000             Henery 100                   Counter  gt                          Inthe Counter screen  touch   Fwd  to display the next screen   or touch  Back  to display the Total o  previous screen  Total Large Size 2  Total Copy 0  3 Touch  Exit   and then touch  Enter  in   Larse Size Copy  o  the next screen that appears  Total Print o  l    To exit the z      Account Authentication screen  touch  Enter  in each screen until  the Basics screen appears     The screen for selecting an account number appears again        12 38 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode 12               Note   In the screen for selecting an account number  touch  Reset All  Counters   then  Yes   and then touch  Enter  to reset all counters for all  accounts to 0        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  12 39    12 Utility mode       To delete an account    l Display the Account Data screen  and then select the desired account  number       For details on displaying the Detail screen for an account  refer to   Specifying account data settings  on page 12 34     The Detail screen appears     pbs eee es         Ifthis machine is being used with  Utility Counter  account track settings specified    D   Delete Account  does not appear   gecount  for accounts that have been Paano  SANI  authenticated              Total  0  Counter      RT  owance   000000
24.      Executive  W   4th tray   LCT A4 U       Double sided copies    A3 a  B4 m to A5 m          Loaded equipment    Paper sizes that can be loaded       Finisher  FS 508        Output tray  OT 601     Output tray 1  2 and optional output tray   90 mm x 140 mm to 297 mm x 432 mm    Group   Sort  settings  182 mm x 140 mm to 297 mm x 432 mm  Staple settings  182 mm x 182 mm to 297 mm x 432 mm    Punch settings  280 mm x 182 mm to 297 mm x 432 mm 2       Saddle stitcher  SD 502     Folding binding  A3 Ga  B4     A4     B5     11 x 17     11 x 14      Letter Ga  182 mm x 257 mm to 297 mm x 432 mm       Mailbin kit  MT 501     182 mm x 182 mm to 297 mm x 297 mm 7  Punch settings  280 mm x 182 mm to 297 mm x 297 mm 2       Job separator  JS 502     A3 a  B4 ato A5 a  A6             Copy output tray  stand   ard        A3 Ga  B4 a to A5     AG ca  8 1 2 x 13 a  11 x 17     11 x 14      Legal     Letter Ga J  Executive Ga y  Invoice Ga qy   non standard sizes           1 There are four Foolscap sizes  8 1 2 x 13      8 1 4 x 13      8x 13 a   and 220 mm x 330 mm a     Any one of these sizes can be selected  For  details  contact your technical representative      2 Can be used when optional punch unit is installed on finisher       MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Copy paper original documents       Paper types and paper capacities                                                                      Paper type Plain paper Thick paper Thin paper Recycled  paper  Weight  Ib  56 g m  9
25.      Unlock    parameter   on page 12 74     For details on the changed network settings  refer to the User manual   Network Scanner Operations      For details on the changed box settings  refer to the User manual  Box  Operations      For details on the changed fax settings  refer to the User manual   Facsimile Operations      XQ       Note   The following software cannot be used when the enhanced security  features are applied    HDD Backup Utility   HDD Twain   Box Operator   Data Administrator       MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  12 71    Utility mode       Specifying the    Enhance Security    parameter    Settings can be specified to enhance security for using the machine     Y in order to set  Enhance Security  to  ON   various conditions  concerning the settings must be met  For details  refer to  Before  specifying the    Enhance Security    parameter  on page 12 69     Display the Admin  2 screen  and then touch  Security Setting           For details on displaying the Admin  2 screen  refer to  Displaying  the Administrator Management screen  on page 12 25     The Security Setting screen appears        Touch  Enhance Security   ERF       The Enhance Security screen  appears              perg  100     Touch  ON   and then touch  Enter      Utility Counter         If the conditions for setting   Enhance Security  to  ON  have  not been met  a message  appears  indicating why the   Enhance Security  parameter  cannot be used  In that case   follow the instructions pro
26.     This manual contains details on basic operations and the operating   procedures for the various copy functions    e Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for copy  functions  including precautions on installation use  turning the machine  on off  loading paper  and troubleshooting operations such as clearing  paper misfeeds    User manual  Network Scanner Operations    This manual contains details on specifying network functions for standard   equipment and on operations for scanning functions    e Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for network  functions and for using the Scan to E Mail  Scan to FTP  Scan to SMB  and Internet fax operations    User manual  Box Operations    This manual contains details on operating procedures for using the Box   functions    e Refer to this user manual for details on printing a proof copy or a locked  job and on functions that use the optional hard disk drive  such as routing  and saving documents in boxes    User manual  Print Operations    This manual contains details on operating procedures using the standard   built in printer controller    e For details on the printing functions  refer to user manual  PDF file  on  User Software CD ROM    Quick Guide  Print Operations    This manual contains details on operating procedures using the standard   built in printer controller    e Refer to this Quick Guide for basic operating procedures on the printing  functions    User manual  Advanced
27.     To clear a paper misfeed in the mailbin kit       1 Open the front door           Turn dial FN5 or dial FN6 to feed out  any misfed paper     N             A    3 While pressing down lever FN7  pull  out any misfed paper                                   aN    Pull handle FN8 to open the misfeed   clearing door                       6 20 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Troubleshooting 6          Ol    Pull out any misfed paper in the  mailbin                             6 Close the misfeed clearing door     N    Close the front door     Q    Detail  For details on the positions of paper misfeeds  refer to  Paper misfeed  indications  on page 6 6        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  6 21    Troubleshooting                                                             Turn dial FN5 or dial FN6 to feed out  any misfed paper    Remove all paper from the output  Open the misfeed clearing door  and  then pull out any misfed paper     tray     To clear a paper misfeed in the saddle stitcher  Open the front door     I    E          MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     6 22    Troubleshooting 6       Close the misfeed clearing door     fa       Close the front door     Q    Detail  For details on the positions of paper misteeds  refer to  Paper misfeed  indications  on page 6 6        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  6 23    6 Troubleshooting       6 3 When the message    Replenish paper     appears    If a tray has run out of paper while copying  or after printing  the message  Replenish
28.     Touch  New Password   type the  onf ira New i                new password into the screen Lozzo   that appeared  and then touch    Enter     Touch  New Password    Confirmation   type the new password again into the screen that  appeared  and then touch  Enter     To change the password  touch  Current Password   type the  current password into the screen that appeared  and then touch   Enter     To cancel changes to the settings  touch  Cancel     For details on typing in text  refer to  Entering text  on page 13 3     The User Information screen appears again        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  12 47    Utility mode       Touch  Enter   and then touch  Enter  in the next screen that appears     If a network is connected  touch  Network Info    and then specify  settings for  E Mail Address    POP3 User Name    POP3  Password    SMTP User Name   and  SMTP Password   For  details  refer to the User manual  Network Scanner Operations    The software switch settings can be specified so that user names  and passwords registered with user authentication can be used in  LDAP searches  For details on the software switch settings  refer to   Specifying software switch settings  machine functions   on  page 12 52  For details on LDAP searches  refer to the User manual   Network Scanner Operations     To exit the User Authentication screen  touch  Enter  in each screen  until the Basics screen appears     A screen for selecting a user number appears again   The machine authentica
29.     cccceeeeneeeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeens 12 74   12 12 Managing the memory  Memory Management parameters       12 76  To erase all data from the internal Memory    sssr 12 76   12 13 Password rules isi aerae mae aaraa aaa ae aaaea na daanan an Aaea aeaiiai iaai 12 78  13 1  Enterig text  sainan sanaaa asaan aaae anadai saddi da aiaa aaan aaia 13 3  Totypetext itan aa eek weer a aat 13 3   List of available characters              ccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseeneeeeees 13 4   aE AE e OEE a T ecdensatiadadzertezcunnceees 13 5  ae ec R INGOX AE AEE EEA E E T 13 8  Contents 12 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        7 Introduction       Introduction 1         mm  1 Introduction    Thank you for choosing this machine     This user manual contains details on the operation of the various functions  of the MP 1025 1020 1035  precautions on its use  and basic  troubleshooting procedures  In order to ensure that this machine is used  correctly and efficiently  carefully read this user manual before using the  machine  After reading the user manual  store it in the designated holder so  that it can easily be referred to when questions or problems arise during  operation     Views of the actual equipment may be slightly different from the illustrations  used in this user manual        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  1 3    1    Introduction       1 1    Energy Star         ENERGY STAR                As an ENERGY STAR   Partner  we have determined that this machine meets  the E
30.    A    er  uthentication                 User Name d       Henery 100        N    Type in a user name specified with  user Nane fencer  Emer    machine authentication  and then    touch  Enter   BHB  HEEGTonaEt   AIDARHAWIHNM   BRIOIVMENMLILI  SPACE    JE     Us   Au                               ser  pent ostia         Caroline        User Name          Henery 100        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  3 51    3 Before making copies          4 Type in the password  and then P  touch  Enter   m   i ei  i    Jog  am  ESTOS p  _  LIC                                           Henery 100         Ifthe username or password was   R  thentication  incorrectly entered  the input  screen appears again  Type in the  correct user name and password   and then touch  Login     ho     Login    aj RAKKAKKRES                  Henery 100         Instead of touching  Login   press the  Access  key to complete the  operation   The User Authentication screen disappears  and the Basics screen  appears        Ifan account synchronized with machine authentication is renamed  or deleted  the message  Your Account has been deleted  Please  contact your administrator   appears     6 Make copies using the desired copy settings        Z When you are finished printing  press  the  Access  key   Access    C    O    A message appears  requesting  confirmation to log off                 3 52 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies 3    The User Authentication screen  appears                  Us
31.    Are the adjustable docu   ment guides incorrectly  positioned against the  edges of the document     Slide the adjustable docu   ment guides against the  edges of the document        Was curled paper loaded  into the paper tray     Flatten the paper before  loading it        The printed page is curled     Was paper that curls  easily  as with recycled  paper  used     Remove the paper from the  paper tray  turn it over  and  then load it again        Replace the paper with pa   per that is not damp           The edge of the printed  output is dirty     Is the document pad  dirty     Clean the document transfer  belt with a soft cloth damp   ened with a mild detergent    See page 11 4         Was the selected paper  size larger than the docu   ment  with a Zoom set   ting of  x 1 0       Select a paper size that is  the same size as the docu   ment    Otherwise  select the  Auto  Zoom  setting to enlarge the  copy to the selected paper  size   See page 4 28            Is the orientation of the  document different from  the orientation of the pa   per  with a Zoom setting  of  Xx 1 0          Select a paper size that is  the same size as the docu   ment  Otherwise  select a  paper orientation that is the  same as that of the docu   ment           MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     6 29       Troubleshooting          Symptom    Possible cause    Remedy       Was the copy reduced to  a size smaller than the  paper  with a reduced  zoom ratio specified      Select a zoom ratio th
32.    Copy paper original documents 8       8 3 Original documents    When making copies  load the document into the ADF or position it on the  original glass     To copy documents that cannot be loaded into the ADF  position them on  the original glass   Documents that can be loaded Into the ADF    There are two methods for using the ADF   e Normal method  e For documents of mixed sizes    There are limits on the types of documents that can be loaded with each  method     Normal method                      Single sided documents Double sided documents  Document paper Plain paper  Plain paper   type Weight 35 g m  to 128 g m  50 g m  to 128 g m   Document size A3 Ga to B6 Ga  Paper capacity 80 sheets  80 g m  paper              For documents of mixed sizes                   Single sided documents Double sided documents  Document paper Plain paper  50 g m  to 128 g m   type Weight  Document size Refer to  Copying documents of mixed sizes     Mixed Original    set   ting   on page 4 17   Paper capacity 80 sheets  80 g m  paper                    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  8 17    Copy paper original documents       Precautions for loading documents Into the ADF    The following types of documents should not be loaded into the ADF   otherwise paper misfeeds or damage to the document may occur     Wrinkled  folded  curled  or torn documents   Highly translucent or transparent documents  such as overhead  transparencies or diazo photosensitive paper   Coated documents such as carb
33.    Fwi  3   on a transparency and an  with mase  E AAD  interleaf     Job List Menory100          If  Blank  is selected  blank  interleaves are inserted between the overhead projector  transparencies      To cancel the  OHP Interleave  function  touch  OFF         Touch the button under  Interleaving Paper            Select the paper tray loaded with the EAA  interleaf paper              Henery 100     Touch  Enter   and then touch  Enter  in the next screen that appears   8 Specify any other desired copy settings     J Press the  Start  key   Copying begins        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Application functions 9       9 4 Adding filing margins to copies     Page Margin     function   Copies can be printed with a filing margin so they can easily be stored in filing  binders  When making double sided copies while using the  Page Margin   function  the orientation of the copied image can be adjusted for the position  of the filing margin  In addition  the image orientation can be adjusted without  creating a filing margin        Left filing margin             Z        QUu   uttti        WHLLUIL1A F                  To copy using the    Page Margin    function    Position the document to be copied          For details on positioning the document  refer to  Feeding the  document  on page 4 9        Touch  Application   and then touch EZA   Page Margin        Basics          The Page Margin screen appears    a ji    Cover Hode    gpsect             Li   Bage         Edge 
34.    Insert paper separators with a different width than the document at  the desired locations for the insertion sheets        For details on positioning the document  refer to  Copying  documents of mixed sizes     Mixed Original    setting   on page 4 17        Ifthe document contains more than 80 pages  refer to  Scanning a  document in separate batches     Separate Scan    setting   on    page 4 13     of the document into separate paper trays     2 Loadthe paper for the insertion sheets and the paper for the main body        Use paper with the same size for the insertion sheets and for the  main body of the document  and load them in the same orientation     Touch  Application   and then touch   Insert Sheet           For details on loading paper  when using thick paper for the  insertion sheets  refer to  Paper  types and paper capacities  on  page 8 5 and  Loading paper  into the bypass tray  on  page 3 58    The Insert Sheet screen appears                             Ready to copy     T               E                  Cover Mode d f        insert oH    Sheet 4  Unter leave j       Maesin  RS  he            K3  a   fEdge Frame    Book Copy7  Erase 4   Repeat d             Pinage  Settings j      Job List                   B W Separate    Reverse Scan    Heae   Y 100            MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Application functions        amp      Touch either  With Image  or  Blank          If  With Image  is selected  the  page after the inserted separator  is copied 
35.    Installation and operation precautions 2       2 3 Laser safety  This is a digital machine which operates using a laser  There is no possibility  of danger from the laser provided the machine is operated according to the  instructions in this manual   Since radiation emitted by the laser is completely confined within protective  housing  the laser beam cannot escape from the machine during any phase  of user operation     This machine is certified as a Class 1 laser product  This means the machine  does not produce hazardous laser radiation        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  2 13    Installation and operation precautions       Internal laser radiation       Specification       Maximum average radiation power    28 9 uW at the laser aperture of the print head unit          Wavelength          770 795 nm       This product employs a Class 3b laser diode that emits an invisible laser    beam     The laser diode and the scanning polygon mirror are incorporated in the print    head unit          A WARNING    Incorrect handling may result in hazardous radiation exposure    gt  The print head unit is not a field serviceable item      gt  Therefore  the print head unit should not be opened under any    circumstances                                                                                          Laser Aperture  of the Print  Head Unit             The laser aperture is positioned behind  the developing unit inside the machine              MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     
36.    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Specifications       Paper Feed Cabinet PC 102       Specifications             Paper types Plain paper  56 to 90 g m     Paper sizes A3 Ga  B4 ca  A4 Ga y  BS    0  A5     Foolscap  11 x 17  Ga  11 x 14 Ga  Legal ca  Letter Ga Q  Executive Ga Q   Paper tray capacity 3rd tray  500 sheets  80 g m         Power requirements    Supplied from main unit       Power consumption    Less than 15 W       Dimensions    570 mm  W  x 548 mm  D  x 263 mm  H        Weight    22 kg          Unit structure       1 paper tray       Paper Feed Cabinet PC 202       Specifications             Paper types Plain paper  56 to 90 g m     Paper sizes A3 Ga  B4     A4 Ga y  BS    0  A5     Foolscap  11 x 17  Ga  11 x 14 Ga  Legal ca  Letter Ga Q  Executive Ga Q   Paper tray capacity Upper tray  8rd tray   500 sheets  80 g m      Lower tray  4th tray   500 sheets  80 g m         Power requirements    Supplied from main unit       Power consumption    Less than 15 W       Dimensions    570 mm  W  x 548 mm  D  x 263 mm  H        Weight    26 kg          Unit structure       2 paper trays       Paper Feed Cabinet PC 402       Specifications             Paper types Plain paper  56 to 90 g m    Paper sizes A4 U  Paper tray capacity 2 500 sheets  80 g m         Power requirements    Supplied from main unit       Power consumption    Less than 45 W       Dimensions    570 mm  W  x 548 mm  D  x 263 mm  H           Weight       26 kg          MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     
37.    a  thentication  in the User Authentication screen  0 L   for external server authentication  and default domain name display   p      in Administrator mode was set to  gt    Eoma e   ON    Domain Name  appears DE  with the domain name set as the  default  Touch  Domain Name  to  display the list of domains registered with Active Directory  and  then select the desired domain  For details on specifying settings  for external server authentication  refer to  To register a user with  external server authentication  on page 12 44        If default domain name display in Administrator mode is set to   OFF    Domain Selection  appears with the name of the default  server  Touch  Domain Selection  to display the list of domains  registered with Active Directory  and then select the desired  domain  However  if multiple domains are not registered   Domain  Selection  will not appear     a                User Name             Henery 100            lt  Type in the user name  and then User Name  touch  Enter            Carol ine     Cee   et   an   aC  Jc  Cd  AS DMOAHHL  ane                                        Aipha  fans   Henery 100        3 36 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies    3       3    4    Ol          Touch  Password      Type in the password  and then  touch  Enter      Touch  Login      If the user name or password was  incorrectly entered  the input  screen appears again  Type in the  correct user name and password   and then touch  Login     In
38.    tre ressentie dans les pi  ces dont  l   a  ration est insuffisante et lorsque une utilisation prolong  e de l appareil  est effectu  e  Pour avoir la certitude de travailler dans un environnement  r  unissant des conditions de confort  sant   et de s  curit    il est pr  f  rable  de bien a  rer la pi  ce ou se trouve l appareil      gt  Placer l   appareil dans une pi  ce largement ventil  e           MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  2 19    Installation and operation precautions       Acoustic noise  For European users only     Maschinenlarminformations Verordnung 3  GPSGV  Der h  chste  Schalldruckpegel betr  gt 70 dB A  oder weniger gem  ss EN ISO 7779     For EU member states only       This symbol means  Do not dispose of this  product together with your household  waste     Please refer to the information of your local  community or contact our dealers  regrading the proper handling of end of   life electric and electronic equipments  zz   Recycling of this product will help to  conserve natural resources and prevent  potential negative consequences for the  environment and human health caused by inappropriate waste handling                 2 20    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Installation and operation precautions       2 4    Caution notations and labels    Safety precaution notations and labels appear on this machine at the  following positions     Be very careful that an accident does not occur when operations such as  removing paper misfeeds are performed    
39.   12 25  Time Zone  Day Light  Saving Time  Language for  Communica   tion  Self Tele  Self Tele   phone   phone    information  1  3 PBX Connec   tion Mode  Dialing  Method  TSI  Registration  Self ID    1    Admin  Set Administra    p  12 29  tor Code In   put  Max  Copy  Sets  Disable Sleep  Mode  Restrict One  Touch Editing  Activity Re   port E Mail  TX                               12 6 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode          Utility Counter                                                                                        Admin  Man    Admin  1 Account   User Authen   agement    User Auth  tication ON     p  12 25  OFF  Allow Print  without Au   thentication      External General Set   Server Au    tings  thentication       Domain Set    Change  ting Settings  Machine User Regis   Auth  Set  tration  ting 1   p  12 34   Account Account Data  Reset All  Track Set  Counters  ting    p  12 42   TX Settings      Quality   Default  Mode Quality  Default  Density  Communica   tion Mode  Comm  Menu   TX  TSI TX Time In   formation  TSI Selection  Rotation TX  2 Sided TX  RX Settings 3 Memory RX Memory Lock  Time Setting   Time  Memory Lock  Password  Confidential  RX User Box  Delete    1S  MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  12 7       Utility mode          Utility Counter                                                                                                                         Admin  Man    Admin  1 FAX Set  RX Functions   Reception  agement     ti
40.   3 Before making copies       Before making copies 3         a  3 Before making copies    3 1 Part names and their functions    Options                                                                               MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  3 3    Before making copies          No    Part name    Description       Main unit    The document is scanned by the scanner sec   tion  and the scanned image is printed by the  printer section    Referred to as the  machine  or  throughout the manual        main unit        Original Cover OC 502    Presses down on the loaded document to keep  it in place  Referred to as the  original cover   throughout the manual        Reverse Automatic Document Feed   er DF 605    Automatically feeds one document sheet at a  time for scanning  and automatically turns over  double sided documents for scanning if the  document was set as double side from the  touch panel   Referred to as the  ADF  throughout the manu   al        Paper Feed Cabinet PC 102    The top tray can be loaded with up to 500  sheets of paper  and the bottom tray can be  used as storage    Referred to as the  single paper feed cabinet   throughout the manual        Paper Feed Cabinet PC 202    Both the top and bottom trays can each be  loaded with up to 500 sheets of paper   Referred to as the  double paper feed cabinet   throughout the manual        Paper Feed Cabinet PC 402    Can be loaded with up to 2 500 sheets of paper  Referred to as the  LCT  throughout the manual      
41.   Job Separator JS 502    Allows printed pages to be separated   Pull the lever when taking out the paper   Referred to as the  job separator  throughout  the manual        Finisher FS 508    Feeds out printed pages  The  Sort  setting   separate by copy set    Group  setting  sepa   rate by page   Staple settings  stapling   and  Punch settings  hole punching  are available   Referred to as the  finisher  throughout the  manual        Output Tray OT 601    Copy output tray installed onto the finisher and  used for separating printed pages   Referred to as the  optional output tray   throughout the manual        Saddle Stitcher SD 502    Installed onto the finisher to allow copies to be  stapled or bound at the center   Referred to as the  saddle stitcher  throughout  the manual              Mailbin Kit MT 501       Installed onto the finisher to divide printed pag   es and feed them into the appropriate bin as   signed to a specific individual or group  only  with PC printing    Referred to as the  mailbin  throughout the  manual              3 4    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies          No Part name    Description       11 Punch Unit PU 501     Installed onto the finisher to allow hole punching  to be used   Referred to as the  punch unit  throughout the  manual        12 Fax Kit FK 503     Allows this machine to be used as a fax machine       13 Scanner Unit SU 501     Internal network scanner unit that allows the  copier to be used as a scanner con
42.   Note    The  Allow Print without Authentication  parameter does not appear if   ON  External Server   was selected in the User Authentication ON OFF    screen        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     12 33          Utility mode                                              12 8 Specifying account data settings   A password and the number of prints allowed can be specified and the   counters can be controlled for each account using this machine    The following procedure describes how to display the desired account    To display the desired account   Yy  Account Track Setting  appear only if the  Account Track  parameter is   set to  ON     Yy A maximum of 1 000 accounts can be registered on this machine   Display the Administrator Management 1 screen  and then touch   Account User Auth        For details on displaying the Administrator Management 1 screen   refer to  Displaying the Administrator Management screen  on  page 12 25    The Account Authentication screen appears    Touch  Account Track Setting     The Account Data screen appears  Uti lity Counter   Touch the button for the range of   accounts that includes the desired Press START to print the counter   accourt  Account Data    To immediately display the  000to093   100to199   200to299   s00t 0399   desired account  touch 2      d   Account     and then use the  keypad to type in the account Ea y  number  ALL Counters qj  Account       The screen for the selected range of   account numbers appears    12 34 MP 1025 1
43.   ON  Change ed  setting is automatically selected ac   cording to the number of copy pages        Q    Detail   If the  Sort Non Sort Auto Change  parameter is set to  ON   the     Uncollated  setting is selected when only one page was copied  and the   Sort  setting is selected when two or more pages are copied        12 18 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5                                                     Utility mode 12  Output Tray Settings  Tab Parameter Description Default setting  5 6 Out  Faxes    Fax Select the output tray for data re   1  output tray 1   put Prints ceived at the fax port   Tray  Set  Port 2 Select the output tray for data re   1  output tray 1   tings ceived at port 2 when the multi  port is installed   Faxes  Select the output tray for data re   1  output tray 1   Prints ceived from the network   Copi  Printer Specify the output tray for com    1  output tray 1   er  puter printouts   Printer  Copies Specify the output tray for cop    2  output tray 2   ies  when the job  separator is in   stalled   1  output tray 1   when the finish   er is installed   Detail     f the optional output tray are installed on the finisher  the factory default  setting for  Copy  is  3   optional output tray              Note    The  Output Tray  parameter appears only if optional finisher or job  separator is installed        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     12 19    Utility mode       Auto Paper Select for Small Orig        Tab    Parameter    Description    Default s
44.   Replenish paper        Simplex     Duplex    C  EN   hange  Setting                                                 J Touch  Change Setting         Select the desired special paper Select paper type and size for  type the Bypass Tray          What types of paper can be      loaded into each paper tray     gt  There are limits on the types of  paper that can be loaded ina  paper tray  For details on the  types of paper that can loaded   refer to  Specifications  on  page 7 3 and  Paper types and paper capacities  on page 8 5              Size    i  Hener 100           MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  8 15    Copy paper original documents       Touch  Enter      The Paper screen appears again   The paper type for the bypass tray is set     XQ       Reminder   If overhead projector transparencies or thick paper is loaded into the  bypass tray  be sure to select the corresponding paper type  otherwise a  paper misfeed may occur     Q    Detail  For details on the special paper  refer to  Special paper  on page 8 6     For details on specifying the settings for paper only for single sided  copying  for recycled paper and for special paper  refer to  Special Paper  Setting    on page 12 15     The settings for overhead projector transparencies  thick paper  thin  paper and envelopes can also be specitied for the bypass tray  even if a  setting for paper only for single sided copying  for recycled paper and for  special paper is specitied        8 16    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  
45.   Supplied from finisher          MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     7 9             Specifications       Job Separator JS 502       Specifications       Number of bins    1 bin                      Paper types Plain paper  56 to 90 g m    thick paper  91 to 210 g m     overhead projector transparencies  postcards  enve   lopes  label sheets  thin paper  50 to 55 g m     Paper sizes A3 a  A4 G q   Paper capacity 100 sheets   Dimensions 450 mm  W  x 443 mm  D  x 75 mm  H    Weight Approx  1 7 kg                7 10    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        8 Copy paper original    documents       Copy paper original documents 8       Zizi    8 Copy paper original documents  8 1 Copy paper  Use paper that meets the following specifications     Possible paper sizes    Non standard sized paper        Paper source Paper width Paper length       Bypass tray 90 mm to 297 mm 140 mm to 432 mm       1st tray               2nd tray       3rd tray       4th tray  LCT                      Double sided copies                  MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  8 3    Copy paper original documents       Standard sized paper        Paper source    Paper size                      Bypass tray A3 Ga  B4 ca  A4    U  BS    0  A5    0  B6 Ga  Foolscap   Ledger ta  11 x 14 Ga  Legal     1st tray A3 Ga  B4 ca  A4    U  B5    0  A5 Ga  Foolscap  11 x 17      11 x 14     Legal ca  Letter          2nd tray   3rd tray A3 Ga  B4 ca  A4 Ga Y  BS    0  A5     Foolscap  11 x 17      11 x 14 ca  Legal     Letter   w 
46.   The list of print counters for each account can be printed by  pressing the  Start  key while the Detail screen is displayed        The list of print counters can be printed if only user authentication  settings have been specified           MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  12 49    12 Utility mode         Touch  Clear Counter  to display a message confirming that the  counters will be reset  To reset all counters for the selected user to          0  touch  Yes        Touch  Counter  to display the  Counter screen  which contains Counter screen  the counters for the selected  user  wUtility Counter        Total    0  Total Large Size 0  Total Copy 0  0    Large Size Copy              Total Print 0  Homer 100     5 Touch  Enter   and then touch  Enter  in the next screen that appears       To exit the User Authentication screen  touch  Enter  in each screen  until the Basics screen appears     A screen for selecting a user number appears again      amp     eee    Note  In the User Information screen or Counter screen  touch  Fwd  to display  the next screen  or touch  Back  to display the previous screen        12 50 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode 12       To delete a user for machine authentication    Display the User Authentication screen for machine authentication         For details on displaying the User Authentication screen  refer to   Specifying user authentication settings  on page 12 42     ieee aia A      To immediately display the Uti lity Counter  de
47.   Using the ADF Using the original Icon Description  glass       Select this setting for a document  loaded with the top toward the  back of this machine                    Select this setting for a document  loaded with the top to the left  side of this machine                                         4 20 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation 4       To select an Original Direction setting    Y Fordetails on positioning the document  refer to  Feeding the document   on page 4 9     1 Position the document to be copied     2 In the Basics screen  touch Re o co  mbine Originals   EE ee ee  ornbine Onainels  IBasics   SPSSPASE   S  aLtY   Application  The Combine Originals screen Paper acon Sing lex  appears  BuSo 000    Por cpa  i Mixed     Finishing 4d   Original      Job List             Touch  Original Direction   Ready to copy     The Original Direction screen  appears                          4 Select the document orientation   Touch the button for the orientation  of the loaded document  and then  touch  Enter             To cancel the Original Direction  setting  touch  OFF                                                      Job List Menory 100        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  4 21    4 Basic copy operation       Selecting the position of the binding margin  Margin settings     When making single sided copies of double sided documents with a binding  margin  or when making double sided copies of single sided documents  with a binding margin  the pos
48.   indications  on page 6 6        6 16 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Troubleshooting 6       To clear a paper misfeed in the LCT       Pull up the lower right side door  release lever  and then open the  lower right side door of the paper  feed unit                 Carefully pull out any misfed paper                    Close the lower right side door     Q    Detail  For details on the positions of paper misteeds  refer to  Paper misfeed  indications  on page 6 6        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  6 17    Troubleshooting       To clear a paper misfeed in the finisher    1    N    A       Open the front door           Lower lever FN1  and then pull out  any misfed paper                    Turn dial FN2              If the punch unit is installed  pull out  the hole punch waste container                       MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        Troubleshooting 6       5 Lower lever FN3  and then pull out  any misfed paper                             Return levers FN1 and FN3 to their original positions   f If the punch unit is installed  insert the hole punch waste container into  its original position     Q  Co  Lower lever FN4                 9 Turn dial FN5 or dial FN6  and then  pull out any misfed paper                 10 Return lever FN4 to its original position     11 Close the front door     Q    Detail  For details on the positions of paper misfeeds  refer to  Paper misfeed  indications  on page 6 6        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  6 19    6 Troubleshooting   
49.   key to print  another proof copy     If copying stops while the Proof  copy screen is displayed or while  changing settings after the proof  copy was printed  press the   Reset  key  Ascreen for stopping  the job appears  Select the job to  be deleted to delete the job     Select a job to delete        11725   19 38     Proof copy     Fl  Pause             arn    Henery 10     KA    Job List 4P     To stop the proof copy while scanning or printing  perform the  operation described in  Stopping deleting a job  on page 4 63     Press the  Start  key     The specified copy settings are queued as a job        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Additional copy operations                      5 3 Interrupting a copy job  Interrupt mode   The current jobs can be temporarily interrupted so a document can be  copied with different copy settings   To interrupt a copy job  Position the document to be copied   Refer to page 4 9 for details    2 Press the  Interrupt  key     If ajob is being printed  the  message  Job is stopping  Interrupt  appears   The indicator on the  Interrupt  key    lights up in green and printing of the A  current job stops       What happens if the  Interrupt  key is pressed while a document is  being scanned    gt  Pressing the  Interrupt  key returns all copy settings  except the  number of copies  to their defaults   Select the desired copy settings   4 Press the  Start  key   Printing begins for the job that the previous job was interrupted for   After the i
50.   r  urkopplad    gt  Betrakta ej str  len        For Norway users       A ADVARSEL     Dette en halvleder laser     gt  Dersom apparatet brukes p   annen m  te enn spesifisert i denne  bruksanvisning  kan brukeren utsettes for unsynlig laserstr  ling som  overskrider grensen for laser klass 1        Dette en halvleder laser  Maksimal effekt till laserdiode er 5 mW og  b  lgelengde er 770 795 nm        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  2 17    Installation and operation precautions       Laser safety label    A laser safety label is attached to the outside of the machine as shown  below     Ta E           p    o o  Thei ey              uuu  o M  I of o  p   JWI   LN    o        dlo  ll        Feo l       CLASS 1 LASER PRODUCT  TASEN KLASSE LERGDURE    1b ay    aes aol AE  9      1M  SRiBeMA                                  MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Installation and operation precautions 2       Ozone release         A CAUTION    Locate the Machine in a Well Ventilated Room    gt  A negligible amount of ozone is generated during normal operation of  this machine  An unpleasant odor may  however  be created in poorly  ventilated rooms during extensive machine operations  For a  comfortable  healthy  and safe operating environment  it is  recommended that the room well ventilated           A ATTENTION    Une quantit   d   ozone n  gligable est d  gag  e pendant le  fonctionnement de l   appareil quand celui ci est utilis   normalement   Cependant  une odeur d  sagr  able peut
51.   the copy   Single sided With the  With Image  With the  Blank   document setting setting                            r F       Cover page                MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  9 3    Application functions       To copy using the    Cover Mode    function    VY The  Cover Mode  function can be used only if the ADF is installed     1    Load the document into the ADF       For details on positioning the document  refer to  Feeding the  document  on page 4 9        Ifthe document contains more than 80 pages  refer to  Scanning a  document in separate batches     Separate Scan    setting   on  page 4 13     Load the paper for the cover pages and the paper for the main body of  the document into separate paper trays         Use paper with the same size for the cover pages and for the main  body of the document  and load them in the same orientation        Touch  Application   and then touch  Reyer   Cover Mode        For details on loading paper n a P O  interleave   Ed                                   when using thick paper for the  Gover Mode    fhast    PHE  cover pages  refer to  Paper Tanl Fel   types and paper capacities  on    Ssn _  Efasctrone   Rekst   page 8 5 and  Loading paper SMEA r  t   into the bypass tray  on  Eiio J  Reverse   G    page 3 58 tree       100     The Cover Mode screen appears                                               Select the desired cover page Ready to copy   settings  e          To cancel the  Cover Mode    Cover Hode i  function  to
52.  11 Specifying security settings  Security Setting    parameters     When the  Enhance Security  parameter of  Security Setting  is applied on  this machine  various security functions are forcibly set in order to prevent  unauthorized use of this machine and increase security when managing  saved data  Restrictions are applied to user operations  and box operations  and print jobs are limited     There are various settings that must first be specified or are forcibly set in  order for  Enhance Security  to be set to  ON   Before setting  Enhance  Security  to  ON   check the settings for the security functions             Reminder    Before specifying encryption settings  disconnect network cables other  than the telephone cable from the machine     If there are settings that are incompatible with  Enhance Security       Enhance Security  cannot be set to  ON       amp     eee    Note    The settings that must be specitied or are forcibly set cannot be changed  after  Enhance Security  is set to  ON         12 68    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode 12       Before specifying the    Enhance Security    parameter    The following settings must first be specified in order to set  Enhance  Security  to  ON         Administrator Management screen Settings       Admin  Set   Administrator Code Input Specify a password that meets the password rules   If the specified password does not meet the pass   word rules   Enhance Security  can be set to  ON    however  the pass
53.  2 5  2 9    Installation and operation precautions            A CAUTION    Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property    gt  Do not ignore this safety advices           Caution Symbol    e The inside of this product has areas subject to high temper   ature  which may cause burns  A       When checking the inside of the unit for malfunctions such as  a paper misfeed  do not touch the locations  around the fus   ing unit  etc   which are indicated by a  Caution HOT  caution  label                 When moving the machine       A CAUTION    Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property    gt  Do not ignore this safety advices           Caution Symbol       e Whenever moving this product  be sure to disconnect the  power cord and other cables  Failure to do this could damage  the cord or cable  resulting in a fire  electrical shock  or  breakdown        e When moving this product  always hold it by the locations  specified in the user manual or other documents  If the unit  falls it may cause severe personal injury  The product may  also be damaged or malfunction                    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Installation and operation precautions       Before successive holidays    When the optional Fax Kit FK 503 is not installed        A CAUTION    Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property      gt  Do not ignore this safety advices           Caution Symbol       e Unplug the product when you will not use the pro
54.  29  Automatically conserving energy  Low Power mode     3 30  Automatically conserving energy  Sleep mode     3 31  Darkening the touch panel  LCD Back Light OFF                 2005 3 32       MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  Contents 3       Controlling machine use with user authentication     machine authentication                   csscesessssccceeeeeeeeeeeeseesessesssssenaees 3 33   Controlling machine use with user authentication    external server authentication                ccceecseceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 36   Limiting user access with account track            eeeseeeesseeeeeseeeeees 3 39   Controlling machine use with user authentication    external server authentication  and account track               ceeee 3 42   Controlling machine use with user authentication    machine authentication  and account track            ccccceceseeseseeeees 3 47   Controlling machine use with user authentication    machine authentication  and account track synchronized            3 51  3 4 Loading paper into the 1st or 2nd tray          cccsssseeeeceeeseeeeeeeeesseeeees 3 54   To load paper  1st or 2nd tray  20 2     eeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 3 54  3 5 Loading paper into the LOT                 ccccssseeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseneeeeeneeseenees 3 56   To load paper  LOT   renia eanna a da a ia 3 56  3 6 Loading paper into the bypass tray                 ceccessseeeeeeeseseeeeeeeneeees 3 58   To load paper  bypass tray            cceeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee
55.  6 6  To clear a paper misfeed in the ADP                 ccceceseeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeee 6 7  To clear a paper misfeed in the fusing UNnit              cceeeeeeeeeee rete 6 9  To clear a paper misfeed in the automatic duplex uniit                  6 13  To clear a paper misfeed in the bypass tray               eceeeeeeeeeeeeees 6 14       Contents 6    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        6 3    6 4    6 5  6 6  6 7  6 8    7 1    8 1    To clear a paper misfeed in the 1st or 2nd tray            ceeeeeeeeee 6 15    To clear a paper misfeed in the 3rd or 4th tray             eeceeeeeeeeee 6 16  To clear a paper misfeed in the LOT    eeeeeeeeeeeseseeeeeneeeeeeeeees 6 17  To clear a paper misfeed in the finisher                      0ssssssssseeeeees 6 18  To clear a paper misfeed in the mailbin Kit                 ceceeeeeeeeeeee 6 20  To clear a paper misfeed in the saddle stitcher                  ceeee 6 22  When the message    Replenish paper     appearS               ccssssse 6 24  To replenishi paper miian oiae Aes A ee tees 6 24  When the message        Not enough remaining memory      APDCANS iesieiscseiscecctendateed lasiendanetensandessedbectenwdcicseladsaduasiedenstuvacnadnieceweds 6 25  When the message    Please exchange toner     appears              6 26  When the message    Stapler empty     appears          ccsssseeeeeeeeeees 6 27  Basic troubleshooting         cccccssseececesseeeeeeeeesseeeeeesseeeeeeeeeseneeneeeeseees 6 28  Main messages and their remedies     
56.  Auto paper select setting 4 26  Auto zoom setting 4 29  Automatic duplex unit 7 5  Automatic panel reset 3 29  Automatic paper tray switching  feature 8 9    D  B     B W reverse setting 9 34  Basics screen 3 79  Book copy function 9 78  Booklet function 9 22  Bypass tray 3 58    las  C    Call technical representative 6 3  Caution notations and labels 2 27  Center binding 4 52   Cleaning 77 3   Combine originals settings 4 46   4 49   Contrast 4 43  4 45   Control panel 3 76  3 22   Copy programs 5 9   Corner staple setting 4 52  Counters 77 6   Cover mode function 9 3    LJ    Default settings 72 27  Document feeding 4 9  Document orientation 7 22  Documents 8 77  Double sided copies 4 42    m    Edge Frame erase function 9 13  Energy star 7 4   Enhance security 72 63  12 68  Enlarge display 3 27  Enlarge Reduce settings 4 33    External server authentication 3 36   12 42    Finisher FS 508 3 74  Finishing settings 4 50    A    Group setting 4 57  4 55       MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     13 8          1 3 Appendix  H O  Hole punch setting 4 58 OHP interleave function 9 9  l Operating environment 2 23  Options 3 3  loons 3 20 Original direction settings 4 20  Image overlay function 9 27 Original glass 4 77  8 19  Image repeat function 9 15 Output tray OT 601 3 74  Image settings functions 9 24  Individual zoom settings 4 35 P  Insert sheet function 9 6 Paper 3 54  3 56  3 58  Interrupt 5 8 Paper capacity 8 5  J Paper feed cabinet PC 102 3 77   j 7 7  Job list 5 22 Paper 
57.  For Denmark users         A ADVARSEL    Usynlig laserstr  ling ved   bning  n  r sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af   funktion     gt  Usynlig laserstr  ling ved   bning  n  r sikkerhedsafbrydere er ude af  funktion  Undg   uds  ttelse for str  ling  Klasse 1 laser produkt der  opfylder IEC60825 sikkerheds kravene        Dette er en halvlederlaser  Laserdiodens h  jeste styrke er 5 mW og  b  lgel  ngden er 770 795 nm   For Finland  Sweden users    LOUKAN 1 LASERLAITE  KLASS 1 LASER APPARAT         A VAROITUS    T  m   on puolijohdelaser     gt  Laitteen K  ytt  minen muulla kuin t  ss   k  ytt  ohjeessa mainitulla  tavalla saattaa altistaa k  ytt  j  n turvallisuusluokan 1 ylitt  v  lle  n  kym  tt  m  lle lasers  teilylle        T  m   on puolijohdelaser  Laserdiodin sunrin teho on 5 mW ja aallonpituus on  770 795 nm        A VARNING    Det h  r   r en halvledarlaser     gt  Om apparaten anv  nds p   annat s  tt   n i denna bruksanvisning  specificerats  kan anv  ndaren uts  ttas f  r osynlig laserstr  lning  som    verskrider gr  nsen f  r laserklass 1        Det h  r   r en halvledarlaser  Den maximala effekten f  r laserdioden   r 5 mW  och v  gl  ngden   r 770 795 nm        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Installation and operation precautions 2          A VAROITUS    Avattaessa ja suojalukitus ohitettaessa olet alttiina n  kym  tt  m  lle  lasers  teilylle    gt   Al   katso s  teeseen             A VARNING    Osynlig laserstralning n  r denna del   r   ppnad och sp  rren 
58.  For details  on storing zoom ratios  refer to  Storing the desired zoom ratio  on  page 4 38    VY The zoom ratios x1 000  x1 000 and x0 930 have been stored     1 In the Basics screen  touch  Zoom   E o    The Zoom screen appears    Basics   Sembage   39uPHt    application    Paper Zoom Duplex       a 71  Finishing 3   Original      Job List          2 Touch  XY Zoom   Re o co    The XY Zoom screen appears  me S    Paper                      x1  000                                                   reae                                                                   3 Touch the button for the desired put the ou  zoom ratio  FL Hie a eee    Basics Smas  osaat fF Application  Paper EX oiis  XY Zoom             EXEM  Sezon   Er   x0  250 4  000 Tet  Minimal             Job List enor 100    4 Touch  Enter      The Zoom screen appears again        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  4 37    Basic copy operation       Storing the desired zoom ratio    Two frequently used zoom ratios and the zoom ratio for the  Minimal  setting    can be stored     vY The zoom ratios x1 000  x1 000 and x0 930 have been stored  When a  new zoom ratio is stored  it overwrites the zoom ratio stored with the    selected button     1 In the Basics screen  touch  Zoom      The Zoom screen appears     2 Touch  XY Zoom      The XY Zoom screen appears     3 Touch  Set Zoom      The Set Zoom screen appears          Basics  Srima  oensiey   Application    Paper Zoom Duplex     puso 000    epic av V  wie  Finishi
59.  Line Monitor Sound Specify the volume  between 0 and 5  of the   3  sound produced when a transmission is be   ing monitored              Job Complete Beep Specify the volume  between 0 and 5  of the   3  tone produced when a job is completed                    XQ       Note  The    Line Monitor Sound  parameter appears only if the optional fax kit   s installed     Panel Cleaning                      Parameter Description  Panel Cleaning A screen is displayed so the control panel can be cleaned   Note    To exit the Panel Cleaning screen  press the  Reset  key           Toner Supply  Parameter Description  Toner Supply Select this parameter if the copies have become faint  for example  im     mediately after the toner bottle is replaced or after copying a large  quantity of documents with large printed areas                    12 24 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode    12       12 4 Displaying the Administrator Management screen    In order to change Administrator Management settings  display the    Administrator Management screen     XQ       Reminder    Be sure to keep the administrator access code in a safe place  If the  administrator access code Is lost while  Enhance Security  is set to  ON    Administrator Management settings can no longer be specified  In this  case  the administrator access code cannot be specitied again  For  details  contact your technical representative     To display the Administrator Management screen    1 Press the  Utility Counte
60.  Scan Operations    This manual contains details on the operating procedures for the functions   that can be used when the optional scanner unit is installed    e Refer to this user manual for details on using the IP address faxing  IP  Relay and Scan to PC operations and on using IP Scanner    1 20 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Introduction 1       User manual  Facsimile Operations     This manual contains details on operating procedures for using the Fax    functions   e Refer to this user manual for details on operating procedures for the Fax    functions when the fax kit is installed        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  1 21    Introduction       1 6    Descriptions and symbols for documents and paper    The use of words and symbols in this manual are explained below        Width    and    Length       Whenever paper dimensions are  mentioned in this manual  the first value  always refers to the width of the paper   shown as  Y  in the illustration  and the  second to the length  shown as  X       Paper orientation    Lengthwise  Ga    If the width  Y  of the paper is shorter than  the length  X   the paper has a vertical or  portrait orientation  indicated by Ga     Crosswise  W    If the width  Y  of the paper is longer than  the length  X   the paper has a horizontal or  landscape orientation  indicated by  y                                   1 22    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Introduction 1       1 7 Legal restrictions on copying    Certain types of documents
61.  Setting                   Parameter Description Default setting  Date  amp  Time Date  amp  Time Specify the year  month  day  hour  24       Setting Setting hour time format   and minutes for the  machine   s internal clock   Time Zone Specify the time zone  between  12 00    and  13 00 in 30 minute increments    Day Light Specify whether or not the machine   s in      Saving Time   ternal clock will follow daylight saving          time                 12 28    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode 12       12 6 Specifying Administrator settings    From the Administrator Set screen  the administrator access code can be  changed or limits can be specified on the number of copies allowed     The following procedure describes how to display the Administrator Set  screen and specify its settings   To specify administrator settings  Display the Administrator Management 1 screen  and then touch   Admin  Set        For details on displaying the Administrator Management 1 screen   refer to  Displaying the Administrator Management screen  on  page 12 25    The Administrator Set screen appears     Select a parameter to be set     Hener100        Specify the desired settings  and then touch  Enter       To cancel changes to the settings  touch  Cancel      To exit the Administrator Set screen  touch  Enter  in each screen  until the Basics screen appears     Q    Detail   For details on specifying the    Restrict One Touch Editing    One Touch   and    Activity Report E Mail T
62.  a E oee a PA T 11 3  FA OUSUING ER EE AE ET E EE 11 3  Original  GlASS  ee  cctea aaa aeann aa aeaaee naa aa E eea Sana aaan 11 3  Gontrolipanielanvdcnes cai Ane ces ata Anata 11 4  DOCUMENT  pad i ecccccccac  cascade caves Guess eaa a d Npe aeaeaei i Nera iena 11 4  Left partition  glaS Senora tan a a aaa E 11 5   11 2 Viewing counters  Total Counter             ssesunnnennnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 11 6  To view the COUNTEIS           eeccceeeeeeeceeeeeeeeaeeeeeteesaeeeeeeeeseeeeeeneeeees 11 6    11 3 When the message    Preventative Maintenance is  required     appear Sa a seen rieni esceeececeees seed ctlenscenecneedeevendeerteseuectenss 11 7       MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  Contents 9       415  mana  HITY MOCE    12 1 Overview of Utility mode parameters          s nsunsnnnnnnnnennnnnennnnnnnnnn nn 12 3  List of registration information and parameters                eseeeee 12 3  12 2 Specifying User   s Choice settings                cccsssseeeeeeseseeeeeeeeseeeeee 12 12  To specify User   s Choice settings          eeseeessseesseeeeeseeeeseeeeeaes 12 12  Mixed Original Detection           eeeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeneeeeeneeeeseeeesaeeeeaes 12 13  Language Selection           csceesseeeesseeeeneeeeseeeeseaeeeeeneeeseneeeeeeeeeeaes 12 13  Machine Authentication PW Change           ccessceeesseeeeeeeeesneeeeenes 12 14  Default setting Simplex DUpIeX   0 2 22       ececeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteteeeeeees 12 14  Auto  Paper Auto ZOOM ieccsesiceccceciscecasscevaaseteascesascteav
63.  a document that contains  only text  touch  Text         For a document that contains  both text and photos  touch  Text   amp  Photo         For a document that contains  photos  touch  Photo         CO      Basics Sroa  Beasiey   Application       Paper Zoom Duplex  Buto 000    Pee pepe    Mixed     Finishing 4   Original      Job List       Ready to copy          CEEREREEERD    aan             Henery 100       For a document that contains faint text  touch  Dot Matrix         4 44    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation 4       Adjusting the copy density  Density settings     Y The default setting is the middle of the five levels  When the  Auto   setting is selected  the  Std   Density setting is set     Y The default Density setting and the density selected when the  Auto   setting is selected can be changed from the Utility mode  For details   refer to  Default Copy Output Levels  on page 12 17     1 In the Basics screen  touch Re o co   Quality Density   a      Basics Srima  Bensiey   Application    The Quality Density screen appears     Paper Zoon Bupiax        Finishing 4   Original      Job List          2 Select the desired Density setting  Ready to copy       Each time  Light  or  Dark  is  touched  the density is lightened  or darkened by one level      Touch  Auto  to automatically  adjust the density according to  the document that is loaded                             FJob List Memory 100        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  4 45    4 Basic c
64.  an uneven  surface   Paper that has been treated  such as carbon backed  heat sensitive or  pressure sensitive paper   Paper that has been decorated with foil or embossing   Paper of a non standard shape  not rectangular    Paper that is bound with glue  staples or paper clips   Paper with labels attached   Paper with ribbons  hooks  buttons  etc   attached    Paper storage    Observe the following precautions when storing the paper     Store paper in a cool  dark location with little humidity    If the paper becomes damp  paper misfeeds may occur  Paper that has  not been loaded should be kept wrapped or placed in a plastic bag and  stored in a cool  dark location with little humidity    Store the paper laying flat  not standing on its edge  Curled paper may  cause paper misfeeds    Keep paper out of the reach of children        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Copy paper original documents 8       Automatic paper tray switching feature    If the selected paper tray runs out of paper while a job is being printed and a  different paper tray is loaded with paper meeting the following conditions   the other paper tray is automatically selected so printing can continue  If the  optional LCT is installed  a maximum of 3 650 copies  with A4 QJ paper  can  be made continuously     Operating Conditions   e The paper is the same size    e The paper is positioned in the same orientation   e The paper is the same type     Order for selecting the paper trays    As a factory default  wh
65.  appears  T l     Cover Hode   EA a ik or ries  Pie  eo  EE g atoy     AA A eo  Ecne Ia _    Segavet   Touch  Stamp   Ready to copy    To cancel the Image Settings   Basics    functions  touch  OFF    The Stamp screen appears     Bathar ing ai Stamp      Job List Menory100                 Select the desired stamp text and the  desired setting under  Pages         Basics Griginais  bensity   Application    s    snl OFF__   Enter_      Pages  ee Ce                   If  Pages  is set to  First page  only   the stamp is only printed  on the first page of the copy  If   All Pages  is selected  the stamp                                      i i DO NOT    ares   is printed on all pages  Sony  FINAL J  sig P29    To cancel the  Stamp  function  can  Herer 100     touch  OFF      Touch  Enter   and then touch  Enter  in the next screen that appears   Specify any other desired copy settings   Using the keypad  type in the desired number of copies     Press the  Start  key   Copying begins        9 26    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Application functions 9       9 10 Printing copies overlapping a different image     Image  Overlay    function     Images previously stored on the hard disk can be printed overlapping copies     To store an overlay image  Store Overlay    VY The  Store Overlay  function is available only if optional hard disk is  installed    1 Position the overlay document to be stored on the hard disk       For details on positioning the document  refer to  Feeding t
66.  are installed  no  buttons appear  If users are not  registered   User Authentication   does not appear     The Security Setting screen appears again                    pere  100      amp     eee    Note   f the password is not authenticated  even after the operation has been  set so that the access lock is no longer applied  restart the machine     The access lock can be canceled by turning the machine off  then on  again with the main power switch     When turning the machine off  then on again with the main power switch   wait about 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off  The  machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after  being turned off        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  12 75    12    Utility mode       12 12 Managing the memory  Memory Management    parameters     Data stored on the internal memory can be erased  and all programmed and  specified settings can be set to their defaults      amp         Reminder  Before managing the memory  disconnect network cables other than the  telephone cable from the machine     Ifthe  Overwrite All Data  parameter on the Memory Management screen  is selected  all programmed and specified settings are reset to their  defaults  Therefore  the machine may not operate correctly after all data  is overwritten  Overwrite all data when disposing of the machine  Do not  perform this operation in any other circumstances     Wait at least two minutes after turning on the machine before deleting al
67.  as much  as possible into the feed slot     Slide the lateral guides to fit the size  of paper being loaded       Do not load so many sheets that  the top of the stack is higher than  the    mark  A maximum of 150  sheets of plain paper can be  loaded        Slide the lateral guides firmly up  against the edges of the paper          a                Lateral guides             How is curled paper loaded    gt  Flatten the paper before loading it     Select the paper type  Select paper type and size for  the Bypass Tray     What paper type is selected  when label sheets are loaded      gt  Select  Thick                        3 58 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies 3       XQ       Reminder  For details on the paper sizes  refer to  Copy paper  on page 8 3     ae    Reminder  When loading postcards  load them in the Ga orientation  as shown  Do  not load postcards in the  d orientation     A maximum of 50 postcards can be loaded into the bypass tray                K                                 Reminder  A maximum of 50 overhead projector transparencies can be loaded into  the bypass tray           AW                             MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  3 59    Before making copies       ae    Reminder   Before loading envelopes  press them down to make sure that all air is  removed  and make sure that the folds of the flaps are firmly pressed   otherwise the envelopes may become wrinkled or a paper misfeed may  occur     When loading envelopes  load
68.  authentication and specify the screen that appears as a default when  User    List  is touched     Settings at time of purchase                      Bit 76543210  Setting 00000000  HEX  00   Specifying the setting    The grayed out cells are the settings at the time of purchase        Bit    Description    Setting Description       7  6  5  4 3    00000  Do not change these  bits when specifying  settings for this func   tion        2 1    Specifies whether or  not the user list is dis   played and whether  or not the user list is  the default     00 Does not display the  user list        01 Displays the user list   but does not specify it  as the default        11 Specifies the user list  as the default                 0  Do not change this  bit when specifying  settings for this func   tion                 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     12 65    Utility mode       Specifying the deleting method for  Del   in input screens  mode 478     Specify the deleting method for  Del   in input screens     Select whether the character at the cursor   s position or the character to the  left of the cursor is deleted     Settings at time of purchase                      Bit 76543210  Setting 00000000  HEX  00   Specifying the setting    The grayed out cells are the settings at the time of purchase        Bit    Description    Setting Description       Specify the deleting  method for  Del   in in   put screens     0 Deletes the character  at the cursor   s posi   tion       1 Deletes 
69.  cancel changes to the settings  touch  Cancel      Touch  Enter   and then touch  Enter  in the next two screens that  appear       To exit the Account Authentication screen  touch  Enter  in each  screen until the Basics screen appears     The screen for selecting an account number appears again   The new account is registered     XQ       Note  The account name appears on the button for the registered account  number        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  12 37    12 Utility mode       To manage an account    The settings for registered accounts can be changed and the counters can  be controlled     Y The list of print counters for each account can be printed by pressing the   Start  key while the Detail screen is displayed   1 Display the Account Data screen  and then select the desired account  number         For details on displaying the Detail screen for an account  refer to   Specifying account data settings  on page 12 34     The Detail screen appears     Select the desired settings  a     p            I            Touch  General Settings  to Uti lity Counter  display the Account Registr  D  screen  and then change the    gecount sage  settings  Password i XKKXRXEEEK eee       For details on changing settings letal  i0 te        in the Account Registr  screen   refer to  To register an account   on page 12 36        Touch  Clear Counter  to display a message confirming that the  counters will be reset  To reset all counters for the selected account  to 0  touch  Yes   
70.  cannot be pulled out   pull the lever for the sliding plate of l  the bypass tray  and then pull the Sx    sliding plate toward you     ala   a    a  ao                Press down on the sliding plate with  your left hand and carefully pull out  any misfed paper     15      cy                   EF  co    a        4 Return the bypass tray to its original position     Q    Detail  For details on the positions of paper misteeds  refer to  Paper misfeed  indications  on page 6 6        6 14 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Troubleshooting 6       To clear a paper misfeed in the 1st or 2nd tray       Open the bypass tray                 2 Pullup the lower right side door  release lever  and then open the  lower right side door of the paper  feed unit indicated in the touch panel  message                                9 Carefully pull out any misfed paper                       Aa      Close the lower right side door     5 Close the bypass tray     Q    Detail  For details on the positions of paper misteeds  refer to  Paper misfeed  indications  on page 6 6        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  6 15    6 Troubleshooting       To clear a paper misfeed in the 3rd or 4th tray       Pull up the lower right side door  release lever  and then open the  lower right side door of the paper  feed unit                 Carefully pull out any misfed paper                       Close the lower right side door     Q    Detail  For details on the positions of paper misfeeds  refer to  Paper misfeed
71.  copy using the    Image Repeat    function    Position the document to be copied     For details on positioning the document  refer to  Feeding the    document  on page 4 9     Load the paper to be used into the desired paper tray     Touch  Application   and then touch     Book Copy Repeat      The Book Copy Repeat screen  appears     Touch  Image Repeat      To cancel a Book Copy Repeat  function  touch  OFF         Ready to copy          T  1  F  insert M  Cover Mode j   sheet Jl pa  idk    Bage mee g gory       Margin j  Erase                                                                   A A aT   Settings     Reverse   Ea         Job List    Heae   Y 100           Ready to copy     j SPieinats       Book TA                AIA  BERSE  RS  TEE wi Book Copy Jl Booklet      Job List             Henery 100        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Application functions       rey       4     e 2i       Touch  Auto Detect  or  Oversized MIERE ATIT Eb iaia on    Paper   depending on the area of the  document to be scanned     If  Auto Detect  is selected  the  area of a standard document size  is scanned  Continue with step 8   If  Oversized Paper  is selected   the size can be selected or a non   standard size can be entered   The Oversized Paper screen appears    To cancel the  Image Repeat  function  touch  OFF      Original Size       H Auto  oversized  H  Detect Paper i       Job List Memory 100           Select the size of the area to be Select the size of the Origi     
72.  damage    gt  Observe all warnings in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use  of the machine   Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in  slight injuries or property damage    gt  Observe all cautions in order to prevent injuries and to ensure safe use  of the machine   Sequence of action  The number 1 as formatted here  indicates the first step of a sequence  of actions   An illustration inserted  Subsequent numbers as formatted here shows what operations  here indicate subsequent steps of a must be performed   sequence of actions      Text formatted in this style  provides additional assistance    gt  Text formatted in this style describes the action that will ensure the  desired results are achieved   1 18 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Introduction 1       Tips    XQ       Note  Text highlighted in this manner contains useful information and tips to  ensure safe use of the machine             Reminder  Text highlighted in this manner contains information that should be  reminded     Q    Detail  Text highlighted in this manner contains references for more detailed  information     Special text markings     Stop  key  The names of keys on the control panel are written as shown above   MA SETTING    Display texts are written as shown above        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  1 19    Introduction          1 5 User manuals   The following user manuals have been prepared for this machine    User manual  Copy Operations   this manual
73.  data on the  not image data on the hard disk is not over   hard disk is overwrit  written when it is de   ten to delete it  1 leted    1 Image data on the  hard disk is overwrit   ten when it is deleted    fe ee 0  Do not change this   bit when specifying  settings for this func   tion    4 For security  specify   0 Do not apply a pass   whether to apply a word rule  password rule    1 Apply a password rule   3 2 1 0 J                       0000  Do not change these   bits when specifying  settings for this func   tion            1 This setting is applied after the machine is turned off  then on again        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     12 63    Utility mode       Q    Detail   If  Enhance Security  is set to  ON   the access lock  password rules and  overwriting of temporary data are enabled  For details on the  Enhance  Security  parameter  refer to  Specifying security settings  Security  Setting parameters   on page 12 68     The access lock can be canceled with each password  For details  refer  to  Canceling an access lock     Unlock    parameter   on page 12 74     For details on the password rules  refer to  Password rules  on  page 12 78     XQ       Note  If bit 6 is set to  1   the scanning and printing speed may be reduced        12 64    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode       Specifying the setting for displaying a list of users in the User  Authentication screen  mode 471     Specify whether or not  User List  appears in the screen for machine 
74.  default   Text  nal original type setting   Type Text  Photo   Text  amp  Photo  Dot Matrix       Default Copy Output Levels          Lighter  Std   Darker    Tab Parameter Description Default setting  4 6 Default For Auto Select one of the following as the Std    Copy Mode  default copy density setting when   Output the setting is specified automatical    Levels ly        ForManual   Touch  Light  and  Dark  to select  Mode  one of the nine levels for the default  copy density when the setting is  specified manually                    Middle of the nine  levels       Print Density                      Tab Parameter Description Default setting  4 6 Print Density Select one of the following as the default   0   printing density     2   1  0  1 2          MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     12 17          12 Utility mode       Default Finishing Mode          Tab Parameter Description Default setting  4 6 Default Finishing Select one of the following as the default   Non Sort  Mode sorting setting     Non Sort  Sort  Group       Select one of the following as the default   Not specified  Finishing setting   Corner Staple    2 Staples  Hole Punch                      XQ       Note   Corner Staple  and  2 Staples  appear only if optional finisher is installed      Hole Punch  appears only if optional punch unit is installed     Sort Non Sort Auto Change                         Tab Parameter Description Default setting  5 6 Sort Non SortAuto   Select whether the  Sort  or  Uncollat  
75.  describes how to display the User Management    screen and specify its settings   To specify user management settings    1 Press the  Utility Counter  key     The Utility Counter screen appears     2 Touch  User Management   Uti lity Counter    The User Management screen  appears     ua 1  Setting 4    Management      TEE FAN   Management  Reports      Printer  Setting    3 Selecta parameter to be set        2     Total  Counter  0    Total Copy  Counter    0  Total    Copy Size           confirma  9 Alarm  Line Moni   tion Beep j   Volume j   t  r sound J  i j       rene    Supply           4 Specify the desired settings  and then touch  Enter        To cancel changes to the settings  touch  Cancel         pere  100       To exit the User Management screen  touch  Enter  in each screen    until the Basics screen appears     Q    Detail    For details on the  Print Management  and  POP3 RX  parameters  refer    to the User manual  Facsimile Operationsj        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     12 23    12 Utility mode       Tone volume parameters    In the User Management screen  sound levels can be specified for the     Confirmation Beep    Alarm Volume    Line Monitor Sound   and  Job  Complete Beep  parameters        Parameter Description Default setting       Confirmation Beep Specify the volume  between 0 and 5  of the   3  tone produced when a key is pressed        Alarm Volume Specify the volume  between 0 and 5  of the   3  tone produced when an alarm is sounded       
76.  document can be fed auto   matically  one page at a time  This feed method can also be       documents that cannot be fed through the ADF           Using the original glass Place the document directly on the original glass so that it  can be scanned  This method is best with books and other          To load the document into the ADF    Yy Donotload documents that are bound together  for example  with paper    clips or staples     VY For details on the types of documents that can be loaded into the ADF     refer to  Original documents  on page 8 17     VY Do not load more than 80 sheets or so many sheets that the top of the    stack is higher than the W mark  otherwise a document misfeed or    damage to the document or machine may occur  However  a document  that exceeds 80 pages can be scanned in separate batches  For details     refer to  Scanning a document in separate batches     Separate Scan       setting   on page 4 13     Vv Ifthe document is not loaded correctly  it may not be fed in straight or a    document misfeed or damage to the document may occur        Slide the adjustable document  guides to fit the size of the  document                    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     4 9    Basic copy operation       Load the document face up in the  document feed tray         Loadthe document pages so that  the top of the document is toward  the back or the left side of the  machine     Slide the adjustable document  guides against the edges of the  document       For d
77.  message appears  requesting  confirmation to log off        The Account Track screen appears           Account  Name          Honor 100        3 40 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies 3       Q    Detail  For details on specifying account track settings  refer to  Specifying  account data settings  on page 12 34     The accounts can be managed using the Account Data parameters in  Aaministrator mode  available from the Utility mode  Settings should be  specified by the administrator        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  3 41    3 Before making copies       Controlling machine use with user authentication  external server  authentication  and account track    If user authentication settings have been specified and accounts have been  registered by the administrator  the use of this machine by that user can be  managed with each account     Users registered with multiple accounts can switch the account that is  logged on to be able to use this machine  An example where external server  authentication settings have been specified with user authentication is  described below     Y Contact your administrator for passwords     VY User names and passwords for external server authentication are  registered and managed with the external server     j Touch  User Name   Input User Name and Password to login   Select the domain from  Domain Name                        For details on specifying settings   B  fkentic  tion  for external server authentication       refer t
78.  must be near the equipment and easily accessible     Otherwise you can not pull out the power plug when an emer   gency occurs                    2 6 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Installation and operation precautions 2       Power plug         A WARNING    Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death    gt  Do not ignore this safety advices           Warning Symbol       e Do not unplug and plug in the power cord with a wet hand   as an electrical shock could result        e Plug the power cord all the way into the power outlet  Failure    Q  to do this could result in a fire or electrical shock  Q                     A CAUTION    Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property    gt  Do not ignore this safety advices           Caution Symbol       e Do not tug the power cord when unplugging  Pulling on the  power cord could damage the cord  resulting in a fire or elec   trical shock        year and clean the area between the plug terminals  Dust that  accumulates between the plug terminals may cause a fire     e Remove the power plug from the outlet more than one time a                  Grounding         A WARNING    Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death    gt  Do not ignore this safety advices           Warning Symbol       e Connect the power cord to an electrical outlet that is    equipped with a grounding terminal   amp     MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  2 7                   2 Installation and operation p
79.  must never be copied with the purpose or intent  to pass copies of such documents off as the originals     The following is not a complete list  but is meant to be used as a guide to  responsible copying      lt Financial instruments gt    Personal checks   Traveler   s checks   Money orders   Certificates of deposit   Bonds or other certificates of indebtedness  Stock certificates     lt Legal documents gt    Food stamps   Postage stamps  canceled or uncanceled   Checks or drafts drawn by government agencies  Internal revenue stamps  canceled or uncanceled   Passports   Immigration papers   Motor vehicle licenses and titles   House and property titles and deeds     lt General gt   e Identification cards  badges  or insignias  e Copyrighted works without permission of the copyright owner    In addition   t is prohibited under any circumstances to copy domestic or  foreign currencies  or works of art without permission of the copyright owner     When in doubt about the nature of a document  consult with legal counsel        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  1 23    1 Introduction          1 24 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        2 Installation and operation    precautions       Installation and operation precautions            LL    2    2 1    Installation and operation precautions    Safety information    This section contains detailed instructions on the operation and maintenance  of this machine  To achieve optimum utility of this device  all operators  should carefully read 
80.  or malfunction        e Do not use flammable sprays  liquids  or gases near this  product  as a fire could result     QDOOODS                    2 8 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Installation and operation precautions 2       Ventilation         A CAUTION    Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property    gt  Do not ignore this safety advices           Caution Symbol       e Always use this product in a well ventilated location  Operat   ing the product in a poorly ventilated room for an extended  period of time could injure your health  Ventilate the room at  regular intervals                 Actions in response to troubles         A WARNING    Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death    gt  Do not ignore this safety advices           Warning Symbol       e Do not keep using this product  if this product becomes inor   dinately hot or emits smoke  or unusual odor or noise  Imme   diately turn OFF the power switch  unplug the power cord  from the power outlet  and then call your authorized service  representative  If you keep on using it as is  a fire or electrical  shock could result        e Do not keep using this product  if this product has been  dropped or its cover damaged  Immediately turn OFF the  power switch  unplug the power cord from the power outlet   and then call your authorized service representative  If you  keep on using it as is  a fire or electrical shock could result                    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase
81.  reached     Contact your administrator        Properly close the section s  indi   cated by the arrow s     Since a machine door or  cover is open or an op   tion is not installed cor   rectly  the machine is  unable to make copies     Make sure that all doors and  covers are closed and that all  options are installed correctly        Install the imaging Unit    The imaging unit is not in   stalled correctly     Reinstall the imaging unit or  parts  or contact your techni   cal representative        Replenish paper           The indicated tray has  run out of paper        Load paper into the indicated  tray  For details on loading pa   per into the paper trays  refer  to  Loading paper into the 1st  or 2nd tray  on page 3 54    Loading paper into the LCT   on page 3 56  and  Loading  paper into the bypass tray  on  page 3 58           MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        Troubleshooting          Message    Possible cause    Remedy       Please exchange toner     The toner is about to run  out     Prepare to replace the toner  bottle according to your main   tenance agreement        There is no Toner     Since the toner has run  out  the copier is unable  to make copies     Replace the toner bottle ac   cording to your maintenance  agreement        Stapler empty  Replace Staple  Cartridge or cancel Staple mode     The staples have run out     Replace the staple cartridge   For details on replacing the  staple cartridge  refer to  Re   placing the staple cartridge   on page 10 
82.  reached  the  screen is screen is  scrolled down scrolled down  one line and one line and  the right edge the left edge                   is displayed  A Xo is displayed     Touch in this Touch this arrow Touch in this  area to scroll to scroll down  area to scroll  down and to down and to  the left  the right     When a button on the screen is touched to display a different  screen  the screen returns to its standard size  However   touching the touch panel again displays the screen enlarged                 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  3 21    3 Before making copies       3 2 Adjusting the angle of the control panel  The control panel can be adjusted to any of three angles     Adjust the control panel to the angle that allows for easy operation                                   1 Upper position  base position   2 Middle position  3 Lower Position                               To adjust the angle of the control panel       Pull the control panel release lever  toward you  and then push down on Control panel release lever  the control panel                 3 22 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies 3          The control panel stops at the middle  position           To adjust the control panel to an  even steeper angle  pull the control  panel release lever toward you  and  then push down on the control panel     N    The control panel stops at the lower  position           3 To return the control panel to the  upper position  pull the control panel  release 
83.  received             Indicates that computer data waiting to be printed remains       Indicates that the selected paper tray is empty       Indicates that the toner bottle must be replaced       gag    Indicates that the imaging unit must be replaced       D     Indicates that the time for the periodic maintenance has passed on a ma   chine that requires a periodic maintenance       Fa    Indicates that user authentication or account track settings have been  specified on this machine       Indicates that copying was stopped when a proof copy is printed          oe       Indicates that  Enhance Security  is set to  ON              3 20    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies 3       Enlarging the touch panel screens    Press the  Enlarge Display  key  Then  touch the touch panel to display the  selected area enlarged at the center of the panel  Press the  Enlarge Display   key again to return the screens to the standard size  The usual touch panel  operations can be performed even when the screens are enlarged        F Combine   Quality     Basics Originais    Paper Zoom Duplex    Tatahi Mixed g  Finishing 3   origina       Job List       Touch in this Touch this arrow Touch in this  area to scroll to scroll up  area to scroll  up and to the up and to the    left  right     Touch this arrow Touch this ar           to scroll left  row to scroll   When the left right  When the  edge of the right edge of  screen is the screen is  reached  te     gt   amp  A    
84.  screen       4  i    Press the  Accessibility  key     Accessibility    at          The Accessibility Settings screen Accessibility Settings   EEnter_   appeals wee eee en mn    Screen Hode Normal Screen  Key Speed Settings 0 3   0 1  Extend Auto Reset   OFF    Notification Screen 3 sec               Sound Setting     I Nornal    Key Sound Tones i High  Disable                            Nd    N    Touch the button for the Accessibility function whose setting is to be  changed     The screen for the selected function appears     Q    Detail  To return to the Basics screen trom the Accessibility Settings screen     press the  Accessibility  key or the  Reset  key  or touch  Enter    Set  or   Reset       f  Reset  in the Accessibility Settings screen is touched to return to the  Basics screen  the settings specitied in the Accessibility Settings screen  are not applied  and the Basics screen is reset to its factory default  settings     If  Set  or  Enter  in the Accessibility Settings screen is touched to return  to the Basics screen  the Basics screen is displayed with the settings  specified in the Accessibility Settings screen applied        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  5 15    Additional copy operations       To set the    Screen Mode    function    Select whether the screens appear in the touch panel in black on white or in  white on black     V The factory default setting is  Normal Screen      Display the Accessibility Settings screen   For details  refer to  page 5 
85.  the image type of the document to better adjust    the copy quality        Sheet Cover Chapter In   sert    Select from the functions that are available to edit copies as desired           Sleep Mode The machine automatically enters this mode  where it conserves en   ergy  if no operation is performed for the specified length of time   The machine conserves more energy in this mode than in Low Power  mode    Sort Select this setting to separate each set of the copies  The second    copy set is printed after all of the first copy set is finished        User Authentication    Set this function to manage individual users access to the machine   With machine authentication  the number of prints and scans are  counted for each user  With external server authentication  limita   tions can be placed on user access              XY Zoom Touch this button to use the keypad to specify the zoom ratio for  producing an enlarged reduced copy of the loaded document   Zoom Specify the zoom ratio of the copy              13 7    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        Appendix    13       13 3 Index       SVIT  gt      Power   auxiliary power  key 3 24  x1 0 setting 4 29       Numerics   1st tray 3 54   2in1 4 47   2 staples setting 4 52  2nd tray 3 54   4in1 4 48    A  A    Access lock 72 63  12 74  Accessibility 5 75   Account data 72 34   Account track 3 39  12 31  12 34  ADF 4 9  8 77   Admin  set  72 29   Administrator management 72 25  Authentication 3 33  3 57  Authentication form 72 37  
86.  the keypad  type in the starting PPF anced  a  Sr  number under  Starting Number        a      Basics gomping     The starting number can be set    Set Nunbering i  between 0 and 999  j    Pages  i Text Density      Press the  C   clear  key to reset e ae   Starting Number  to  1      Hi  parker          artin First page H    To cancel the  Set Numbering    Ruaber       function  touch  OFF   Laa     Job List   Free                5 Select the desired settings under  Pages  and  Text Density         If  Pages  is set to  First page only   the distribution number is only  printed on the first page of the copy  If  All Pages  is selected  the  distribution number is printed on all pages        Select a setting under  Text Density  to specify the density of the  printed distribution number     re  Q     Touch  Enter   and then touch  Enter  in the next screen that appears     f Specify any other desired copy settings     Using the keypad  type in the desired number of copies      lt o     Press the  Start  key     d    Copying begins        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  9 25    Application functions       To print preset text at the center of the copy image     Stamp    function     a      i    fy    Position the document to be copied       For details on positioning the document  refer to  Feeding the  document  on page 4 9        Touch  Application   and then touch  Reyer                                                      Image Settings      d iol  The Image Settings screen
87.  the last character   s replaced with the last character entered     List of available characters       Type Characters       Alphanumeric  ABCDEFGHIJKLMNOPQRSTUVWXY Zabcdefghijkimnoparstuvwxyz  characters   symbols     Space      8           lt   gt 7 L _ I      7 0123456789                   13 4 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     13       13 2 Glossary                Term Definition   Simplex Duplex Select the setting to specify if the scanned document and the printed  copy are printed on just one side or both sides    Access lock Operations that the access lock is applied to are locked so that the  password cannot be entered after it has been incorrectly entered  three consecutive times    Accessibility Specify these settings to set up and adjust the control panel and    touch panel        Account Track    Set this function to group users into accounts and manage their use  of the machine  printing and scanning counts and number of prints                  ADF Reverse automatic document feeder  Can be used to automatically  scan the document   AMS Auto Magnification Select   Auto Zoom  setting   APS  Auto Paper Select  setting   ATS Automatic paper tray switching feature  ATS   Auto tray switch        Automatic paper tray   switching feature    If a paper tray runs out of paper while copies are being printed and  the same size of paper is detected in a different paper tray  that pa   per tray is selected so that copying can continue        Automatic panel reset    The machin
88.  the same size as the  document is selected     If the zoom ratio was increased or decreased  a paper size that corresponds  to the specified zoom ratio is automatically selected   1 In the Basics screen  touch  Paper      The Paper screen appears   Basics  5     Application    Paper Duplex    fEiniching   Mixed     Finishing 4   Original      Job List emery 100          2 Touch  Auto Paper Select   Re o co    askana aata Gompine   Quality  Application      Basics Originais f Densi     peer E a   siete T Fas                                                  a  Setting                   Q    Detail   f the document size cannot be detected  remove the document  and then  load it again     Ifa document with an irregular size is loaded  specify the paper size  manually   Refer to  Manually selecting the desired paper size  on  page 4 27         4 26 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation 4       Manually selecting the desired paper size    The paper size can be specified for copying  By also selecting the  Auto  Zoom  setting  the most appropriate zoom ratio is selected based on the size  of the loaded document and the specified paper size  For details on the   Auto Zoom  setting  refer to  Automatically selecting the zoom ratio     Auto  Zoom    setting   on page 4 29     1 In the Basics screen  touch  Paper   E o co    The Paper screen appears   Basics  52m2   38At   application    Paper Zoom duplex       Finishing 4   Original                         Job List amo
89.  them with the flap side up  as shown  If the  envelopes are loaded with the flap side down  a paper misfeed may  occur  The flap side of envelopes cannot be printed on     A maximum of 10 envelopes can be loaded into the bypass tray     After you have loaded the paper  set the paper type for the bypass tray  in the touch panel     f the Envelope setting was set  the loaded document is copied upside   down                                VANNY  f                  y                                3 60    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies 3               Reminder  Be sure to load label sheets so that the side to be printed on faces down     A maximum of 50 label sheets can be loaded into the bypass tray           I            AW                                amp     Reminder  A maximum of 150 sheets of thin paper can be loaded into the bypass  tray           i        A                                 amp     Note  The image will be printed on the surface of the paper facing down when  the paper is loaded into the bypass tray        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  3 61    3 Before making copies    Q    Detail  For details on specifying the paper size for the bypass tray  refer to  To  specify the paper size  Change Setting   on page 8 10           3 62 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5           l Basic copy operation       Basic copy operation 4       sia  4 Basic copy operation    4 1 General copy operation    This section contains information on the general opera
90.  then Ready to cop  select the desired position          Touch  Auto  to automatically  determine the position of the  punched holes according to the  orientation of the loaded  document        perg  100     Touch  Enter      The Finishing screen appears again        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  4 59    Basic copy operation       Binding copies at the center    Copies can be fed out folded in half and stapled at two places along the                   center   Document Bound copy      Booklet    function  folded in half and stapled  is set   at two places   Paper Weight Paper Size Number of Bound Pages       56 g m  to 90 g m        A3 a  B4 a  A4       2 to 15 sheets          To bind copies at the center    Y For details on specifying the  Booklet  function  refer to  Creating  booklet copies     Booklet    function   on page 9 22    V The position of the fold and the center staples can be adjusted from the  Utility mode  For details  refer to  Crease Center Staple  on page 12 20     1 Select the  Booklet  function in the Book Copy Repeat screen of the    Application screen     2 In the Basics screen  touch   Finishing        Basics Srima  Bensiey   Application    Paper Zoon    amp Lex   Duplex      Mixed     Original      Job List emery 100    Finishing            4 60    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation 4          3 The Finishing screen appears  Ready to copy  1  Touch  2 Staples  and  Crease        To cancel center binding  touch   2 Staples  and  Cre
91.  to 20 mm             To copy using the    Edge Frame Erase    function    Position the document to be copied       For details on positioning the document  refer to  Feeding the  document  on page 4 9        Touch  Application   and then touch ESHA   Edge Frame Erase   i                      The Edge Frame Erase screen i nl  appears   Cover Mode   ree Tecan    he  Page  mes    git _goPy7  Margin dj  Al    SMEA   w D  F nage f EN  Separate  Settings jj   Reverse Scan    Mob List Memory 100                                3 Specify the area to be erased  Teta hade ight Boeition as  SfemacTar ivete the original        Touch the button for erasing the  left side  the top  or a surrounding  frame     To cancel the  Edge Frame  Erase  function  touch  OFF            Job List Memory 100        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  9 13    Application functions       o1    N    Touch       erased        to specify the width of the area to be    Touch  Enter    Specify any other desired copy settings   Using the keypad  type in the desired number of copies     Press the  Start  key   Copying begins   Note     f the frame is selected  the same width is erased on all four sides of the  document     The area to be erased indicates the area on each document page        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Application functions       9 6    Tiling copy images     Image Repeat    function     Multiple copies of the specified scanning area can be printed on a single  sheet of paper                    To
92.  touch   Enter     A value outside the allowable  range cannot be entered    To change the entered value   press the  C   clear  key  and then  enter the correct value     O Touch  Enter      d then touch the button for the    te   and then touch the button for  e     Select the size of the Origi   nal  or choose Custom Size     Uti lity Counter                Store ven Cancel J  Enter        ASD   A6D    BG BD            FLS                    Input the Custom Size of the 1  Original using the 10 key pad     Uti lity Counter                9 28    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Application functions 9       T Select the document orientation  Pisca the Original on the Glasz    then press the Start Key       To cancel changes to the Utility Counter          settings  touch  Cancel      Original  Direction                            8 Press the  Start  key     The document is scanned  and the overlay image is stored             Note  The size of the scanned area appears on the button where the image is  stored        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  9 29    Application functions       To recall an overlay image    Stored overlay images can be recalled and printed overlapping copies     VY The  Image Overlay  function is available only if optional hard disk is    installed     1 Position the document to be copied         For details on positioning the document  refer to  Feeding the    document  on page 4 9        Touch  Application   and then touch   Image Settings      The Imag
93.  with the program POEET   number button that is pressed  a   n  message appears  requesting  confirmation to overwrite the  program  To overwrite the  program  touch  Yes   and then  touch  Enter   To cancel the  registration  touch  No   and then Henory100   touch  Enter     9 What if programs have already been registered to all of the program  numbers       f there are no program numbers where no program has been  registered yet  the program registered at a program number will be  overwritten  To check the copy program settings before overwriting  it  refer to  Checking the copy settings  Mode Check   on page 5 3                 Detail   To stop registering the program  press the  Reset  key or the  Mode  Memory  key  No matter which screen is displayed  the registration is  cancelled        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Additional copy operations 5       To recall a copy program    The registered copy programs can be recalled and used for copying     1 Position the document to be copied   Refer to page 4 9 for details         2 Press the  Mode Memory  key   The Program screen appears  Mode Memory   J           oO S  then press the appropriate job   key      Tostoprecallingacopy program   Progran a  press the  Reset  key or the   Mode Memory  key        Can the specified settings for a  copy program be checked     gt  To check the program copy  settings before recalling the copy Memory 100   program  refer to  Checking the  copy settings  Mode Check   on page 5 3        
94. 00  Do not change these  bits when specifying  settings for this func   tion        4 3    Specifies the units  used to display and  specify lengths  shown in the screens    00 Displayed in millime   ters  mm        01 Displayed in inches   decimals        10 Displayed in inches   fractions        2 1 0             000  Do not change these  bits when specifying  settings for this func   tion                 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     12 59    Utility mode       Specifying settings when copying is finished using the ADF  mode 429     Specify whether or not all settings are reset when copying is finished using    the ADF     Settings at time of purchase                      Bit 76543210  Setting 00000100  HEX  04   Specifying the setting    The grayed out cells are the settings at the time of purchase                             Bit Description Setting Description  7 6 ween enn nnnnnannnn      00  Do not change these  bits when specifying  settings for this func   tion   5 Specify whether or 0 Automatic panel reset  not all settings in the operation is not per   Basics screen are re  formed   set when copying is 7  finished using the 1 Automatic panel reset  ADF  operation is per   formed   4 3 2 1 0   meen neewnnnnnnonnnnn  00100  Do not change these  bits when specifying  settings for this func   tion              12 60    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        Utility mode    12       Specifying the pressing of the  Access  key when logging off  mode 438     Select whethe
95. 020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode 12          4 Select an account number  Select Account    Account Data      Select a tab  and then touch the oli ire We Tra it s Ire iz seke     button for the desired account  number      To exit the  Account Authentication screen   touch  Enter  in each screen until    the Basics screen appears                                                                    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  12 35    12 Utility mode       To register an account    The account name  password  and number of prints allowed can be specified  for each account using this machine   Yy A maximum of 1 000 accounts can be registered on this machine     Y lfuser authentication and account track are synchronized  100 accounts  can be managed     1 Display the Group Data screen  and then select an available account  number         For details on displaying the Account Registr  screen  refer to   Specifying account data settings  on page 12 34     The Account Registr  screen appears        2 Touch  Account Name   Account  000                                                                                                                                                                         The Account Name screen appears                                                                                                                                                                                           000000                3 Type in the account name  up to 8 Account 
96. 020 1035  Phase 2 5  3 31    3 Before making copies       Darkening the touch panel  LCD Back Light OFF     If no operation is performed for a specified length of time  the touch panel  goes off and the machine enters a mode where it conserves energy     The power conservation effect is slightly reduced  however  the machine can  quickly recover to begin copying or printing     As the factory default  the touch panel goes off after 1 minute     To turn on the touch panel backlight    Press any key in the control panel or touch the touch panel       The touch panel can also be turned on by opening the original cover  or loading a document into the ADF     2 The job will be received immediately     Q    Detail  The length of time until the machine touch panel goes off can be set from  Utility mode  For details  refer to  LCD Back Light OFF  on page 12 16        3 32 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies 3       Controlling machine use with user authentication  machine  authentication     If machine authentication settings have been set by the administrator  this  machine can only be used by users registered with machine authentication     VY When machine authentication settings have been specified  only users  that enter user names and passwords registered with user authentication  can use this machine     Y Contact the machine   s administrator for a user name and password   Y A maximum of 100 users can be registered with machine authentication     4       Hene
97. 1 Press the  Utility Counter  key     The Utility Counter screen appears     2 Touch  User Setting   Uti lity Counter    Total  Counter    ele  Setting 4    Management      0    maoe e Total copy  f Admin  Hi    Management    Reports   Counter    0    eae Total  Setting Sopy Size _       3 Touch  User   s Choice      The User   s Choice screen appears  Uti lity Counter  User Setting                                                                                                                                                                                                                                        4 Select a tab  and then select a  parameter to be set  Five    278    976   are   57e   eve                                                    User   s Choice  ined OF oo            English             Henery 100        12 12 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode 12       9 Specify the desired settings  and then touch  Enter          Tocancel changes to the settings  touch  Cancel      To exit the User   s Choice screens  touch  Enter  in each screen until  the Basics screen appears     Mixed Original Detection                   Tab Parameter Description Default Setting    1 6 Mixed Original De    Specify whether or not the  Mixed Origi    OFF  tection nal  setting is selected as a default           Language Selection          Tab Parameter Description Default Setting    1 6 Language Selec  Select one of the following as the lan  English  tion guage in which mes
98. 1 g m  50 g m  56 g m   to to to to  90 g m  210 g m  55 g m  90 g m   Paper source  Bypass tray 150 sheets 50 sheets 150 sheets 150 sheets  1st tray 500 sheets         500 sheets  2nd tray 500 sheets 500 sheets  3rd tray 500 sheets 500 sheets  4th tray 500 sheets 500 sheets  LCT 2 500 sheets 2 500 sheets  Double sided copies O         O  Paper type Overhead Postcards Envelopes Label sheets  projector  transparenci   es  Paper source  Bypass tray 50 sheets 50 sheets 10 sheets 50 sheets  1st tray                  2nd tray  3rd tray  4th tray  LCT          Double sided copies                      MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     8 5       Copy paper original documents       Special paper    Paper other than plain paper  such as overhead projector transparencies and  recycled paper  is called special paper  Be sure to select a special paper  setting for paper trays loaded with media such as overhead projector  transparencies and recycled paper in order to prevent operating errors        Paper type    Icon    Description       OHP    Select this setting when overhead projector transpar   encies are loaded    A paper tray with this setting is not automatically se   lected when the  Auto Paper Select  setting is spec   ified or when the paper trays are switched  automatically        Thick    Select this setting when thick paper with a weight of  91 g m  to 210 g m  is loaded    A paper tray with this setting is not automatically se   lected when the  Auto Paper Select  setting is s
99. 15      2 Touch  Screen Mode    The Screen Mode screen appears     Select the setting for the desired  touch panel display                Touch  Inverted Screen  to  specify that the screens appear in  the touch panel in white on black        Touch  Normal Screen  to return Garsen  the touch panel to its original  display               amp      Touch  Enter      The Accessibility Settings screen appears again        5 16    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Additional copy operations    5       To set the    Key Speed Settings    function    It is possible to specify the length of time until the value begins to change  after a touch panel button is held down and the length of time for the value    to change to the next number     VY The factory default setting for  Time to Start  is 0 3 second  and the  factory default setting for  Interval  is 0 1 second     l Display the Accessibility Settings screen   For details  refer to    page 5 15      2 Touch  Key Speed Settings      The Key Speed Settings screen appears     J Touch and to specify the  starting time and the interval for the  key repeat feature    The starting time and the interval for  the key repeat feature specify the  speed at which a value changes  when or is held down to  change a setting     m    Set Key Repeat settings   Press CHECK to confirm the settings        Key Speed Settings  Time To Start    Interval                            Interval  Starting time                    How are the specified time setting
100. 3   Ferntree Gully MDC  Vic 3165   Australia  http   www oce com au     Oc   Osterreich GmbH  Postfach 95   1233 Vienna   Austria  http   www oce at        Oc   Belgium N V S A   J  Bordetlaan 32   1140 Brussel   Belgium  http   www oce be     Oc   Brasil Com  rcio e Industria Ltda   Av  das Na    es Unidas  11 857  Brooklin Novo   S  o Paulo SP 04578 000   Brasil   http   www oce brasil com br        Oc   Canada Inc    4711 Yonge Street  Suite 1100  Toronto  Ontario M2N 6K8  Canada   http   www oce ca     Oc   Office Equipment  Beijing  Co    Ltd    Xu Mu Cheng   Chaoyang District   Beijing 100028   China   http   www oce com cn        Oc   Czech Republic Itd   Hanusova 18  140 21 Praha 4    Oc   Danmark a s  Vallensb  kvej 45  2605 Br  ndby       http   www oce fi     Czech Republic Denmark  http   www oce cz  http   www oce dk    Oc   Finland OY Oc   France S A   Valkj  rventie 7 D  PL 3 32  Avenue du Pav   Neuf  02130 Espoo 93161 Noisy le grand  Cedex  Finland France    http   www oce fr        Oc   Deutschland GmbH  Solinger Stra  e 5 7  45481 M  lheim Ruhr  Germany  http   www oce de           Oc   Hong Kong and China head office  12 F 1202 The Lee Gardens   33 Hysan Avenue   Causeway Bay   Hong Kong   http   www oce com hk        Oc   MP1020 25 35  Phase 2 5           Oc   Hungaria Kft   1241 Budapest  Pf   237   Hungary  http   www oce hu     Oc   Ireland Ltd    3006 Lake Drive   Citywest Business Campus  Saggart   Co  Dublin   Ireland   http   www oce ie        Oc   
101. 5  10 21    1 0 Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers       Return the copy output tray to its original position        Close the misfeed clearing door     4    16 Close the front door      amp         Reminder   f stapling still cannot be resumed  even after performing the above  procedure  contact your technical representative        10 22 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers 1 0       10 4 Emptying the waste containers    If the hole punch waste container in punch unit installed on finisher becomes  full  the message shown below appears     Hol e Punch      Job List       Basics Grisinais  bensiey   Application    Finishing         Sort I  ea  Soe      Job List             To empty the hole punch waste container    Follow the procedure described below to empty the hole punch waste  container        1 Open the front door                       MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  10 23    1 0 Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers          2 Pullout the hole punch waste  container                 3 Empty the hole punch waste  container                 A     amp  Insert the hole punch waste container at its original position      6       Close the front door        10 24 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        7 7 Care of the machine       Care of the machine 1 1       in  11 Care of the machine    11 1 Cleaning    This section describes the procedures f
102. 6    Zoom settings 4 28       13 10    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Reader s comment sheet    Questions    Have you found this manual to be accurate   O Yes  O No    Were you able to operate the product  after reading this manual   O Yes  O No    Does this manual provide sufficient background information   O Yes  O No    Is the format of this manual convenient in size  readability and arrangement  page  layout  chapter order  etc      O Yes   ONo    Could you find the information you were looking for   O Always   O Most of the times   O Sometimes   O Not at all    What did you use to find the required information   O Table of contents  O Index    Are you satisfied with this manual   O Yes  ONo    Oc   MP1020 25 35  Phase 2 5     Thank you for evaluating this manual   If you have other comments or concerns  please explain or suggest improvements  overleaf or on a separate sheet     Comments     Date     This reader s comment sheet is completed by    If you prefer to remain unknown  please do fill in your occupation     Name    Occupation    Company    Phone    Address    City    Country    Please return this sheet to   Oc   Technologies B V   For the attention of ITC User Documentation   P O  Box 101    5900 MA Venlo   The Netherlands    Send your comments by E mail to  itc userdoc  oce nl    For the addresses of local Oc   organisations see  http   www oce com    Oc   MP1020 25 35  Phase 2 5     Addresses of local Oc   organisations       Oc   Australia Ltd    P O  Box 36
103. 7 7             Specifications       Finisher FS 508       Specifications       Output trays    Output tray 1  output tray 2       Feed settings     Non Sort    Sort    Group   Staple settings  and Punch  settings       Paper types    Output tray 1    Plain paper  56 to 90 g m     Thick paper  91 to 210 g m    overhead projector trans   parencies  postcards  envelopes  label sheets   Punch settings  Plain paper  60 to 90 g m     Output tray 2    Plain paper  56 to 90 g m     Staple settings  Plain paper  56 to 90 g m     Punch settings  Plain paper  60 to 90 g m         Paper sizes    A3 a  A4    0       Paper capacity    Output tray 1    Plain paper  56 to 90 g m    200 sheets   Thick paper  91 to 210 g m    overhead projector trans   parencies  postcards  envelopes  or label sheets  20  sheets   Output tray 2    Plain paper  80 g m    1 000 single sided sheets  500  double sided sheets       Amount of shift    30 mm       Staple settings    Paper sizes  no  of bound pages   A3 Ga  A4 Ga y       Punch settings    Paper sizes  A3 Ga  A4 Ga y  Number of punched holes  4       Power requirements    Supplied from main unit       Power consumption    Less than 66 W          Dimensions 319 mm  W  x 558 mm  D  x 573 mm  H   When the tray is pulled out  435 mm  W   Weight 21 4 kg  including the horizontal transport unit        Consumables          Staples MS 5D  5 000 staples for stapling 50 sheets  x 2          Punch Unit PU 501       Specifications       Punched holes    4       P
104. 8        Misfeed detected     Since a paper misfeed  occurred  the machine is  unable to make copies     Clear the paper misfeed  See   When the message    Misfeed  detected     appears  on   page 6 5        Return the following number of  originals to Document Feeder   22    After clearing a paper  misfeed  it is necessary  to reload certain pages of  the document that have  already been fed through  the ADF     Load the indicated document  pages into the ADF        Malfunction detected   Please call your Technical Repre   sentative           The machine malfunc   tioned and is unable to  make copies        Inform your technical repre   sentative of the code dis   played on the touch panel        If any message other than those listed above appears  perform the operation    described in the message        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     6 33       6 Troubleshooting          6 34 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        7 Specifications       Specifications       EE T    7    7 1    Specifications    Specifications    Copier       Specifications       Type    Desktop console       Document holder    Stationary  mirror scanning        Photoconductor    OPC       Luminous source    Cold cathode tube       Copying system    Digital laser copying       Developing system    HMT developing method  HMT OR        Fusing system    Heat roller fixing system       Resolution    600 dpi x 600 dpi       Document    Types  Sheets  books  page spreads   and three dimensional  objects   Size  Ma
105. 8152 Glattbrugg 54 Asoke Road  Schweiz Sukhumvit 21  http   www oce ch  Bangkok 10110  Thailand  Oc   Nederland B V  Oc    UK  Limited  P O Box 800 Oc   House  5201 AV  s Hertogenbosch Chatham Way  The Netherlands Brentwood  Essex CM14 4DZ  http   www oce nl  United Kingdom    http   www oce co uk        Oc   North America Inc    5450 North Cumberland Avenue  Chicago  IL 60656   USA   http   www oceusa com                       Note  The web site http   www oce com gives the current addresses of the local    Oc   organisations and distributors              Note  The addresses of local Oc   organisations for information about the Wide  Format Printing Systems and the Production Printing Systems can be different  from the addresses above  Refer to the web site http   www oce com for the    addresses you need        Oc   MP1020 25 35  Phase 2 5     
106. Document scales Used to align the document  See page 4 11    8 Power cord Supplies power to the machine                      3 8    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies          No     Part name    Description       Main power switch    Used to turn the machine on and off  See  page 3 24  page 3 28        10    ADF connector    Used for connecting the ADF hookup cord       11    TEL PORT1 jack    Used for connecting a telephone       12    LINE PORT1 jack    Used for connecting the general subscriber line       13    TEL PORT2 jack    Used for connecting the cord from the tele   phone       14    LINE PORT2 jack    Used for connecting the general subscriber line       15    IEEE1284 port  type C     Used for connecting a parallel cable from the  computer       16    Network connector  10 Base T 100  Base TX     Used for connecting the network cable when  this machine is used for network printing and  network scanning       17    USB port  type B  USB 2 0 1 1 com   pliant    Used for connecting a USB cable from the com   puter       18    Ozone filter     Collects the ozone generated in the machine       19          Filter        Collects the toner dust generated in the ma   chine          Parts marked with an asterisk     are internal options and therefore are not  shown in the illustration        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     3 9    Before making copies       Reverse Automatic Document Feeder DF 605                                                         
107. Frame     Book Copy7  Margin 4   Erase 4   Repeat dj   S  AR ose   Wheel  we    image   BZW Separate  Settings     Reverse Scan  Free      Job List                                           MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  9 11    9 Application functions           amp     shown below  e original    Select the position of the filing notin  ORE APPA position gs  margin  BCE Cos 2 a n  Or         Touch the button for a left filing  margin or for a top filing margin     To cancel the  Page Margin   function  touch  OFF                              Job List Memory 100     4 Touch and        Can only the orientation of the image be adjusted     gt  Set the width of the filing margin to 0 to adjust only the orientation  of the image during double sided copying   The margin position can be changed without changing the margin  width        to specify the width of the filing margin     5 Touch  Enter       Specify any other desired copy settings      Using the keypad  type in the desired number of copies        Press the  Start  key   Copying begins             Note  The filing margin position indicates the position on each document page        9 12 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Application functions 9       9 5 Erasing unwanted areas of copies     Edge Frame  Erase    function   Copies can be produced by erasing unwanted areas around the document     such as the transmission information on received faxes and the shadows of  punched holes                                         A  5 mm
108. Installation and operation precautions 2       CDRH Regulation    This machine is certified as a Class 1 Laser product under Radiation  Performance Standard according to the Food  Drug and Cosmetic Act of  1990  Compliance is mandatory for Laser products marketed in the United  States and is reported to the Center for Devices and Radiological Health   CDRH  of the U S  Food and Drug Administration of the U S  Department of  Health and Human Services  DHHS   This means that the device does not  produce hazardous laser radiation     The label shown on page 2 18 indicates compliance with the CDRH  regulations and must be attached to laser products marketed in the United  States        A CAUTION    Incorrect handling may result in hazardous radiation exposure     gt  Use of controls  adjustments or performance of procedures other than  those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation  exposure        This is a semiconductor laser  The maximum power of the laser diode is 5  mW and the wavelength is 770 795 nm     For European Users         A CAUTION    Incorrect handling may result in hazardous radiation exposure     gt  Use of controls  adjustments or performance of procedures other than  those specified in this manual may result in hazardous radiation  exposure        This is a semiconductor laser  The maximum power of the laser diode is  5mW and the wavelength is 770 795 nm        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  2 15    Installation and operation precautions      
109. Italia S p A    Strada Padana Superiore 2 B  20063 Cernusco sul Naviglio  MI   Italia   http   www oce it     Oc   Japan Corporation  3 25 1  Nishi Shinbashi  Minato Ku   Tokyo 105 0003   Japan  http   www ocejapan co jp        Oc   Belgium S A    Rue Astrid 2 A   1143 Luxembourg Belair  http   www oce lu     Oc   Malaysia Sdn  Bhd     3 01  Level 3  Wisma Academy  Lot 4A  Jalan 19 1   46300 Petalig Jaya   Selangor Darul Ehsan   Malaysia  http   www ocemal com my        Oc   Mexico S A  de C V   Prolongaci  n Reforma 1236   4to Piso   Col  Santa F    Del  Cuajimalpa  C P  05348   M  xico  D F    M  xico  http   www oceusa com     Oc   Norge A S   Postboks 4434 Nydalen  Gjerdrums vei 8   0403 Oslo   Norway  http   www oce no        Oc   Poland Ltd  Sp z 0 0    ul  Bitwy Warszawskiej 1920 r  nr  7  02 366 Warszawa   Poland   http   www oce com pl           Oc   Lima Mayer  S A    Av  Jos   Gomes Ferreira  11 Piso 2    Miraflores   1497 139 Alg  s   Portugal   http   www oce pt        Oc   MP1020 25 35  Phase 2 5           Oc   Singapore Pte Ltd     Oc   Printing Systems  PTY  Ltd        190 MacPherson Road P O Box 629   03 00 Wisma Gulab Rivonia 2128  Singapore 348548 South Africa   Oc   Espafia SA Oc   Svenska AB  Business Park Mas Blau Sollentunavagen 84    Osona  2 08820 El Prat de Llobregat  Barcelona   Spain   http   www oce es     191 27 Sollentuna  Sweden  http   www oce se        Oc   Schweiz AG  Sagereistrasse 10    Oc    Thailand  Ltd   B B  Building 16 Floor       CH
110. Kit MT 501                                     Saddle Stitcher SD 502                   No  Part name Description   1 Copy output tray Collects copies   2 Misfeed clearing door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds within  the finisher             Mailbin Kit MT 501                         No  Part name Description   3 Mailbins Collects printed pages   4 Misfeed clearing door Opened when clearing paper misfeeds  5 Output tray cover Opened when clearing paper misfeeds             MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     3 13    Before making copies       Finisher FS 508 Output Tray OT 601 Punch Unit PU 501                                              Finisher FS 508                                     No  Part name Description  1 Output tray 2 Collects copies that are fed out   elevated tray   2 Output tray 1 Collects copies that are fed out   non sorted copy tray   3 Lever FN1 Lowered when clearing paper misfeeds within  the finisher  4 Dial FN2 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the  finisher  5 Hole punch waste container Removed when emptying hole punch waste  that has accumulated from using the punch set   tings  6 Lever FN3 Lowered when clearing paper misfeeds within  the finisher  7 Lever FN4 Lowered when clearing paper misfeeds within  the finisher             MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies 3          No  Part name Description       8 Staple cartridge holder Removed from the stapler unit when replacing  the staple cartridge or clearing jammed staple
111. List    3 Press the  Start  key    4 After the current copy job is finished  the next copy job begins    4 62 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation 4       4 12 Stopping deleting a job  The following procedure describes how to stop scanning the document  stop  the printing operation and delete the copy job   To stop delete a copy job    Y Ifa document is being scanned for a job  pressing the  Stop  key stops  scanning and printing        Press the  Stop  key while a  document is being scanned or a job  is being printed        After the message  Copy cycle  temporarily suspended   appears   scanning and printing stops        Stop       The Stop screen appears   el OOOO O O Ce  S r EE   Dialing JEN 2m Dest 1353   sending le  atesaki std 13728                A GK  Fob List uun Memory 10        2 Perform the desired operation          To delete a stopped or queued job  touch the button for the job to  be deleted  The job is deleted     To continue the stopped job  press the  Start  key     Q    Detail  A job can also be deleted from the Job List screens  For details  refer to   To delete a job  on page 5 25     A function other than a copy function cannot be selected while pages are  being scanned for copying  while copy scanning is paused  or while  printing is paused        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  4 63    4 Basic copy operation          4 64 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5           5 Additional copy    operations                      Additional copy operatio
112. List emery 100    Finishing         Specify the necessary copy settings         How is the number of copies specified      gt  For details on specifying the number of copies  refer to  General  copy operation  on page 4 3     Using the keypad  specify the desired number of copies     Position the document to be copied         How is the document positioned      gt  For details on positioning the document  refer to  Feeding the  document  on page 4 9        3 26    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies 3       6 Press the  Start  key   The document is scanned  and the job is added to the list of queued  jobs     Check that the document has finished being scanned  and then  position the next document           Specify new copy settings and the desired number of copies  and then  press the  Start  key         After the machine has finished warming up  the jobs will  automatically be printed in the order that they were queued   How is the printing of a job stopped     Press the  Stop  key  For details  refer to  Stopping deleting a job   on page 4 63        ES    Q    Detail   While the machine is warming up to begin printing after it is turned on  using the  Power   auxiliary power  key  copy settings can be specitied  and a document can be scanned to reserve a copy job  After the machine  has finished warming up  the copies are automatically printed        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  3 27    3 Before making copies       To turn off the machine    1 Press the  
113. NERGY STAR   Guidelines for energy efficiency     What is an ENERGY STAR   Product     An ENERGY STAR   product has a special feature that allows it to  automatically switch to a  low power mode  after a period of inactivity  An  ENERGY STAR   product uses energy more efficiently  saves you money on  utility bills and helps protect the environment        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Introduction 1       1 2    Trademarks and registered trademarks    Netscape Communications  the Netscape Communications logo  Netscape  Navigator  Netscape Communicator  and Netscape are trademarks of  Netscape Communications Corporation     Compact VJE  Copyright 1986 2003 VACS Corp     RC4   is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc  in the  United States and or other countries     RSA   is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc  RSA  BSAFE   is a registered trademark or trademark of RSA Security Inc  in the  United States and or other countries     License information    This product includes RSA BSAFE  Cryptographic software from RSA Security  Inc        M  RSA    SECURED                      MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  1 5    Introduction       OpenSSL Statement  OpenSSL License    Copyright    1998 2000 The OpenSSL Project  All rights reserved    Redistribution and use in source and binary forms  with or without   modification  are permitted provided that the following conditions are met    1  Redistributions of source code must retain the above copyr
114. Name  characters long   and then touch   Enter             To cancel changes to the  settings  touch  Cancel         For details on typing in text  refer  to  Entering text  on page 13 3     The Account Registr  screen appears  Free    again                             4 Touch  Password      The Change Password screen appears        12 36 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode 12    S    Dp ia me oN e  characters long   and then touch     Enter  mad lity Counter _    New Password    Confirm New Password            Ester            Touch  New Password   type the  new password into the screen  that appeared  and then touch   Enter         Touch  Confirm New Password    type the new password again into  the screen that appeared  and then touch  Enter         To change the password  touch  Current Password   type the  current password into the screen that appeared  and then touch   Enter       To cancel changes to the settings  touch  Cancel          For details on typing in text  refer to  Entering text  on page 13 3     The Account Registr  screen appears again           Touch  Max  Print Limit      The Max  Print Limit screen appears     ee a TEEN  cursor to the value to be changed                    dth the keypad t ity _   __  an en use the keypad to specify     the maximum number of prints fanse    allowed       The maximum number of prints  allowed can be set between 0  and 999 999         If  0  is specified  there is no limit  on the number of prints allowed    To
115. ONSEQENTIAL DAMAGES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO   PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE GOODS OR SERVICES  LOSS OF USE   DATA  OR PROFITS  OR BUSINESS INTERRUPTION  HOWEVER CAUSED  AND ON ANY THEORY OF LIABILITY  WHETHER IN CONTRACT  STRICT  LIABILITY  OR TORT  INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE  ARISING  IN ANY WAY OUT OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE  EVEN IF ADVISED OF  THE POSSIBILITY OF SUCH DAMAGE     This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young   eay crypt Soft com   This product includes software written by Tim  Hudson  tjh cryptsoft com         MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Introduction 1       Original SSLeay License    Copyright    1995 1998 Eric Young  eay cryptsoft com  All rights reserved   This package is an SSL implementation written by Eric Young   eay cryptsoft com     The implementation was written so as to conform with Netscapes SSL    This library is free for commercial and non commercial use as long as the   following conditions are aheared to  The following conditions apply to all   code found in this distribution  be it the RC4  RSA  Ihash  DES  etc   code   not just the SSL code    The SSL documentation included with this distribution is covered by the   same copyright terms except that the holder is Tim Hudson    tjnh cryptsoft com     Copyright remains Eric Young   s  and as such any Copyright notices in the   code are not to be removed  If this package is used in a product  Eric Young   should be given attribution as the author of the par
116. Oc      MP 1020 25 35    Tazz   o o an  User Manual Copy    Phase 2 5       Oce   Technologies B V        Copyright     2006 Oc   Technologies B V  Venlo  The Netherlands  All rights reserved  No part of this work may be reproduced  copied  adapted     or transmitted in any form or by any means without written permission from  Oc       Oc   Technologies B V  makes no representation or warranties with respect to  the contents hereof and specifically disclaims any implied warranties of  merchantability or fitness for any particular purpose    Further  Oc   Technologies B V  reserves the right to revise this publication and  to make changes from time to time in the content hereof without obligation to  notify any person of such revision or changes     Edition 2006 10    Trademarks    Oc    MP1020 25 35  Oc   MP1020 25 35  Oc   Doc Exec    Oc   Image Logic     Oc   Scan Logic    Oc   Power Logic    Oc   Print Exec   and Oc   Remote Logic  are registered trademarks of Oc   Technologies B V    Adobe   and PostScript   3    are registered trademarks of Adobe   Systems  Incorporated    Macintosh   is a registered trademark of Apple   Computer  Inc    Microsoft    Windows     Windows NT    Windows 95 98    Windows 2000   Windows XP   and Internet Explorer   are either registered trademarks or  trademarks of Microsoft   Corporation in the United States and or other countries   AutoCAD   is a registered trademark of Autodesk  Inc    Novell   is a registered trademark of Novell  Inc    N
117. Power   auxiliary power  key   The touch panel goes off     A    a Set the main power switch to  O                                Reminder   When turning the machine off  then on again with the main power switch   wait about 10 seconds to turn the machine on after turning it off  The  machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after  being turned off     Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch or the  Power    auxiliary power  key while it is making copies or printing  otherwise a  paper misfeed may occur     Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch or the  Power    auxiliary power  key while it is scanning or sending or receiving data   otherwise all scanned data or transmission data will be deleted     Do not turn off the machine with the main power switch while a queued  job or stored data is waiting to be printed  otherwise the jobs will be  deleted     Q    Detail   The following are cleared when the main power switch and  Power    auxiliary power  key are turned off      Settings that have not been programmed     Jobs queued to be printed       3 28 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies 3       Automatically returning to the default settings  Automatic panel reset     If the  Reset  key is not pressed and no operation is performed for a specified  length of time  settings that have not been programmed  such as the number  of copies  are cleared and return to their default settings     This is the automat
118. Press to display the Utility Counter screen        18  Mode Memory  key    Press to register the desired copy settings as a  program or to recall a registered copy program    See page 5 9        19 Contrast dial    Use to adjust the contrast of the touch panel        20  Enlarge Display  key    Press to enter Enlarge Display mode        21  Accessibility  key             Press to display the screen for specifying user  accessibility functions           MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        Before making copies               Reminder  Do not apply extreme pressure to the touch panel  otherwise it may be  scratched or damaged     Never push down on the touch panel with force  and never use a hard or  pointed object to make a selection in the touch panel     Q    Detail  A function other than a copy function cannot be selected while pages are  being scanned for copying or while copying is paused        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies    3       Basic settings screen  Basics screen     When the machine is ready to begin making copies after being turned on  the  Basics screen appears     To activate a function or to select a setting  lightly touch the desired button  in the touch panel           y e    Basics raginals    Paper Zoom                                                                                                                                                         7     Original    ti        3  6 5 4   No  Item name Description   1 Message disp
119. RECT   INCIDENTAL  SPECIAL  EXEMPLARY  OR CONSEQUENTIAL DAMAGES   INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO  PROCUREMENT OF SUBSTITUTE  GOODS OR SERVICES  LOSS OF USE  DATA  OR PROFITS  OR BUSINESS  INTERRUPTION  HOWEVER CAUSED AND ON ANY THEORY OF  LIABILITY  WHETHER IN CONTRACT  STRICT LIABILITY  OR TORT       MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  1 7    Introduction        INCLUDING NEGLIGENCE OR OTHERWISE  ARISING IN ANY WAY OUT  OF THE USE OF THIS SOFTWARE  EVEN IF ADVISED OF THE POSSIBILITY  OF SUCH DAMAGE     The licence and distribution terms for any publically available version or  derivative of this code cannot be changed  i e  this code cannot simply be  copied and put under another distribution licence  including the GNU Public  Licence      All other product names mentioned are trademarks or registered trademarks  of their respective companies       MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Introduction 1       1 3 Available features    Automatically selecting the paper    The most appropriate paper size can automatically be selected based on the  size of the loaded document and the specified zoom ratio     For details  refer to  Selecting a Paper setting  on page 4 25     Adjusting copies to the size of the paper    The most appropriate zoom ratio can automatically be selected based on the  size of the loaded document and the specified paper size     For details  refer to  Specifying a Zoom setting  on page 4 28     Specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios    By specifying se
120. TETE         To cancel changes to the  settings  touch  Cancel         Ifthe software switch settings are  specified to synchronize external  server authentication and LDAP  authentication  select  Active E  Directory   For details on the  software switch settings  refer to  Specifying software switch  settings  machine functions   on page 12 52     The User Authentication screen appears again           Active  Directory             Touch  Domain Setting   Donain Setting    Enter                 If a domain name is already  registered  touch  Default  Domain Name  in the User  Authentication screen for  external server authentication   poe the default   Jp   cee       The domain name registered in  the first line  upper left  of the Domain Setting screen is the default      A maximum of 10 domain names can be registered with Active  Directory     The Domain Setting screen appears                                      12 44    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode    12          Perform the desired operation     To register a new domain name  select an empty button  and then  touch  Change Setting     To change the name of a registered domain  select the button of the  domain whose name is to be changed  and then touch  Change  Setting     To delete a registered domain name  select the button of the  domain to be deleted  and then touch  Delete     To check the connection with an external server  select the button  of a registered domain name  and then touch  Check Conn
121. Toner   appears     Be sure to use toner bottles of the specified model  otherwise the  machine may be damaged        10 4    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers    10       To replace the toner bottle    Open the machine   s front door     Pull the toner hopper out toward you  as far as possible     While pulling on the handle  flip up  the toner bottle holder     Carefully pull out the used toner  bottle        How is the used toner bottle  disposed of    gt  Do not throw away the empty  toner bottle  Instead  keep it so  that it can be collected by your  technical representative     Hit one end of the new toner bottle  against a hard surface  such as a  desk or table  four or five times  and  then hit the other end four or five  times         The toner within the toner bottle  may have become compacted  If  it has  be sure to shake the toner  bottle until the toner is mostly                                                                   broken up before installing the bottle        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     10 5    1 0 Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers          Shake the new toner bottle up and  down about five times           Insert the toner bottle into the toner  hopper with the label on the bottle  facing up           Flip down the toner bottle holder so  that it locks into place  Grab the seal  on the toner bottle  and then slowly  pull it off toward yo
122. Touch  Book Copy   Ready to copy    To cancel a Book Copy Repeat  function  touch  OFF    The Book Copy screen appears   Honey 100   5 Touch  Left Bind  or  Right Bind   Ready to copy     according to the binding position of  the document     ee    Basics Grigsnais         Left Bind   Separation   f Page   Order      R t Bina  Book   ren Erase                  Job List Memory 100        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  9 19    Application functions          Touch  Separation  or  Book Spread          When separating page spreads Page Order screen  and making double sided copies   touch  Page Order  to display the  Page Order screen  Touch  Book  Order  or  Standard   and then  touch  Enter         Ready to copy     CE  esnie T  3 Originals GEDER  Page Order Enter                Basics                        To cancel the Page Order setting  EBD  BP  touch  OFF    Standard           If  Page Order  is set to  Book  Order   the left and right pages of  the spread are copied onto two  separate sheets of paper in the same page order as the document        If  Page Order  is set to  Standard   the left and right pages of the  spread are copied onto the front and back sides of a single sheet  of paper           Job List Memory 100            If desired  touch  Book Erase  to  display the Book Erase screen  Book Erase screen  Touch the buttons indicated by   Frame   specify the width of the EZEIZA  erased area as and pai     and then touch  Enter                                 Job Lis
123. Touch  Enter      The Program screen appears again        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Additional copy operations 5    Q    Detail  There are three Check Program screens  Touch  Fwd  to display the next  screen  or touch  Back  to display the previous screen        The copy settings cannot be changed from the Program Check screens        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  5 13    5 Additional copy operations       To delete a registered copy program    Registered copy programs can be deleted                                                                             1 Press the  Mode Memory  key   The Program screen appears  Mode Memory  fy  a Touch  Delete   Select RECALL  INPUT  DELETE or CHECK   then press the appropriate job   key   Program  arokoa Oo tT O      Recal       Set     Check    a Ca Cee Pes CS   i E Hi Ad                 Touch the program number button  he eral Mecopy cenlngste MaL  don E  POREO  Save Recall Job Settings  EAA aan is  A message appears  requesting  e  confirmation to delete the copy Ces     program    amp  Touch  Yes   and then touch  Enter   To stop deleting the copy    program  touch  No   and then touch  Enter      The Program screen appears again        5 14 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Additional copy operations 5       5 5 Specifying control panel settings  Accessibility mode     This section contains details on the procedures for specifying control panel  settings and adjusting the touch panel     To display the Accessibility Settings
124. X  parameters  refer to the User manual   Facsimile Operations         MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  12 29             12 Utility mode  Administrator Code Input  Parameter Description Default setting  Administrator Code In  The 8 digit administrator access code 12345678    put          entered in the Administrator Code  screen can be changed   e Current Code   Type in the currently specified admin   istrator access code   e New Code   Type in the new administrator access  code   e Retype New Code   Type in the new administrator access  code again for confirmation                      Note    To change the entered value  press the  C   clear  key  and then enter the    correct value     Max  Copy Sets                               Parameter Description Default setting  Max  Copy Sets Specify the number of copies that can be   OFF  specified  between 1 and 99 or  OFF     Disable Sleep Mode  Parameter Description Default setting  Disable Sleep Mode Select whether or not the setting for dis    No          abling Sleep mode is available    This parameter does not appear if user  authentication settings have been spec   ified on this machine                 12 30    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode 12       12 7 Specifying the account authentication settings  User  Authentication ON OFF parameters     User authentication and account track settings can be specified to control  the use of this machine     User authentication settings are specified to manage individuals  
125. ach set of copies is fed out shifted   Each set of copies is fed out in an  to separate them  alternating crisscross pattern to    separate them                                                                    Group Select this setting to separate the copies of each page in a multi page  document                                                                                         Shift Grouping Crisscross Grouping  The copies of each page are fed The copies of each page are fed  out shifted to separate them  out in an alternating crisscross pat     tern to separate them                                                                                   MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  4 51    Basic copy operation          Setting    Description       Corner Staple    Select this setting to bind the copies with a staple in the upper left corner           7                                        2 Staples Select this setting to bind the copies with two staples   ee      l  Center Binding The copies are folded in half  then stapled at two places along the center       Crease  and  2  Staples  settings           Hole Punch       Holes are punched in the copies for filing them           oooo            oo0oo0o   o                         4 52    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        Basic copy operation 4       Required options for the finishing settings                Setting Required options  Non Sort     Sort     Shift sorting Finisher            Crisscross sorting         Group 
126. age  Selection       Machine Au   thentication  PW Change       2 6    Default Set   ting Simplex    Duplex       Auto Paper    Auto Zoom       Priority Tray       Special Pa   per Setting       Zoom Ratio  for Combine  Booklets       3 6    Low Power  Mode       Sleep Mode       LCD Back   Light OFF       Auto Reset       Auto Reset  when Ac   count is  changed       4 6    4in1 Copy  Order       Default Quali   ty   Density  Modes       Default Copy  Density  Levels       Print Density                   Default Fin   ishing Mode                12 4    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        Utility mode                                                                                        Utility Counter  User Setting   User   s 5 6 Sort   Non   Choice Sort Auto   p  12 12  Change  Output Tray  Settings    Auto Paper  Select for  Small Original  Crease    Center   Staple  6 6 Default  Screen  Default  Device  Image Quality   ADF   E Mail Input     One   Touch  Index  Mail 7  Program 2  Domain Name  Bulletin     Conf  Box  3  Store Overlay   p  9 27   User Confirmation  Management   Beep    12 23  P   Alarm  Volume  Line Monitor  Sound    Job Com   plete Beep  Panel  Cleaning  Toner Supply  Memory RX  ON OFF     POP3 RX                  MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     12 5       12 Utility mode          Utility Counter                                                 Admin  Admin  1 Initial Setting   Date  amp  Time   Date  amp  Time  Manage   p  12 27  Setting Setting  ment   p
127. alue     Touch  1  or  2  to specify where the size is to be stored     If a button is pressed where no size is stored  the stored paper size  appears on the button to indicate that a size has been stored           No program registered       Program registered          POA    oe       2 How is the stored paper size recalled      gt  Touch  1  or  2  in the Custom Size screen to recall the stored paper    size     Touch  Enter   and then touch  Enter  in the next screen that appears     The Paper screen appears again   The non standard paper size is stored        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Copy paper original documents 8       To specify a setting for special paper  Change Setting     If a setting for special paper  such as overhead projector transparencies and  other special paper  is selected for a paper tray  that tray is not selected  automatically with the  Auto Paper Select  setting or the automatic paper   tray switching feature  However  a paper tray set to  Single Sided Only  is  given priority when the  Auto Paper Select  setting is specified     The following procedure describes how to specify the setting for overhead  projector transparencies  thick paper  thin paper or envelopes loaded into  the bypass tray     In the Basics screen  touch  Paper   E    co  The Paper screen appears    Basics   SP SbAge    SEALY   Application    Paper Zoon Duplex  RUSS 000    Petnichi    Hixed  Finishing j   original      Job List       L Select the button for the bypass tray
128. and   account track settings are specified to manage groups of users    e User authentication can be performed by the machine or by an external  server    e With machine authentication  the number of prints and scans made by  each user can be counted    e With external server authentication  the personal boxes of each user can  be managed    e By specifying account track settings  the number of prints and scans  made by each account can be counted and limits can be specified on the  number of prints allowed     The following procedure describes how to specify settings in the User  Authentication ON OFF screen     Q    Detail   Ifan authentication method is set  the authentication screen is displayed  while this machine is in standby  In order to use this machine when user  authentication or account track settings are specified  the user account  name and password must be entered  For details  refer to  Controlling  machine use with user authentication  machine authentication   on  page 3 33     User authentication and account track can be used at the same time  In  addition  specified user authentication and account track settings can be  synchronized     To specify the account authentication settings    Y The user authentication status   ON  External Server   or  ON  MFP    or   Account Track   whichever was specified in the User Authentication  ON OFF screen  appears in the Account Authentication screen     Display the Administrator Management 1 screen  and then touch   Acc
129. and follow the instructions in this manual     Please read the following section before connecting the machine to the  supply  It contains important information related to user safety and  preventing equipment problems     Please keep this manual in a handy place near the machine     Make sure you observe all of the precautions appear in each section of this  manual     KM_Ver 01E_C     amp     eee    Note  Some parts of the contents of this section may not correspond with the  purchased product     Warning and precaution symbols    The following indicators are used on the warning labels or in this manual to  categorize the level of safety warnings        A WARNING    Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death    gt  Do not ignore this safety advices           A CAUTION    Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property    gt  Do not ignore this safety advices           MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  2 3    Installation and operation precautions       Meaning of symbols       Symbol    Meaning    Example    Meaning       A    A triangle indicates a danger  against which you should take  precaution     This symbol warns against pos   sible causes of burns        A diagonal line indicates a pro   hibited course of action     This symbol warns against dis   mantling the device     9       A black circle indicates an im   perative course of action     This symbol indicates you must  unplug the device     A O D                   Disassemble and 
130. aper types    Plain paper  60 to 90 g m         Paper sizes    A3 a  A4 G        Power requirements    Supplied from finisher       Dimensions    114 mm  W  x 461 mm  D  x 136 mm  H           Weight       Approx  1 9 kg             7 8    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Specifications       Saddle Stitcher SD 502       Specifications       Number of bins    1 bin             Paper types Plain paper  56 to 90 g m    Paper sizes A3 a  A4     Paper capacity Plain paper  56 to 90 g m    Maximum 200 sheets or 20    sets       Staple settings    Number of bound pages  2 to 15 sheets          Dimensions 445 mm  W  x 203 mm  D  x 478 mm  H   When the tray is pulled out  576 mm  W  x 281 mm  D   Weight 9 3 kg       Consumables    MS 2C cartridge  for 2 000  x 1          Power requirements       Supplied from finisher       Output Tray OT 601       Specifications       Number of bins    1 bin                            Paper capacity Plain paper  56 to 90 g m    Maximum 200 sheets  Postcards  envelopes  overhead projector transparen   cies  or label sheets  Maximum 20 sheets   Dimensions 282 mm  W  x 368 mm  D  x 57 mm  H    Weight 0 7 kg   Mailbin Kit MT 501  Specifications  Number of bins 4 bins                   Paper types Plain paper  56 to 90 g m     Paper sizes A4 U  B5 U  A5      Paper capacity Maximum 125 sheets  80 g m   per bin   Dimensions 624 mm  W  x 503 mm  D  x 390 mm  H    Weight Approx  8 kg  unit weight   12 kg or less  gross weight           Power requirements     
131. ase  again to  deselect them         Hol e Punch      Gr oup    Job List Memory 100                    4 Touch  Enter      The Basics screen appears again        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  4 61    Basic copy operation             4 11 Scanning the next document during printing    reserving a copy job    The settings for the next copy job can be specified and the document can be   scanned while a copy operation is being performed so that it can be printed   once the current copy operation is finished    To reserve a copy job   Y A copy job can be reserved only if optional hard disk is installed    Y Upto 5 copy jobs  including the current copy job  can be queued    Y A copy job can be reserved after scanning of the loaded document is  finished    Y A copy job cannot be reserved while a document is being scanned    Y For details on positioning the document  refer to  Feeding the document   on page 4 9    y To stop the job being printed  press the  Stop  key  For details  refer to   Stopping deleting a job  on page 4 63  In addition  the job can be  deleted from the Job List screen  For details  refer to  To delete a job  on  page 5 25    1 Press the  Start  key to begin   scanning and printing the current   copy job    A message appears  indicating that   the document is being scanned    Job List    2 Whenthe message  Ready to accept  another job   appears  copy settings sss A umemmianais  rh Ssa 4 Application  can be specified for the next copy  job  Duplex  ours isc   Job 
132. at ad   justs the document size to  the selected paper size    See page 4 28    Otherwise  select the  Auto  Zoom  setting to reduce the  copy to the selected paper  size   See page 4 28         Even though the paper  misfeed was cleared  cop   ies cannot be produced     Are there paper misfeeds  at other locations     Check the touch panel for  other paper misfeed indica   tions  and then remove any  misfed paper at all other lo   cations   See page 6 6         Printing with the  Double   Sided   gt   Single Sided   or  Double Sided   gt    Double Sided  settings  are not possible     Have settings been se   lected that cannot be  combined     Check the combinations of  the selected settings        Copying is not possible  even though the password  is entered on a machine  with user authentica   tion account track set     Did the message  Ac   count has reached its  maximum copy allow   ance   appear     Contact your administrator        ADF    The document is not fed     Is the ADF slightly open     Securely close the ADF        Is the document one that  does not meet the speci   fications     Check that the document is  correctly placed on the orig   inal glass        Is the document correct   ly loaded     Position the document cor   rectly   See page 4 9         Finisher       The finisher cannot be  used     Is no power supplied to  the connector     Check that the cord is cor   rectly inserted into the con   nector        The pages cannot be sta   pled     Have the sta
133. ay to its original position        10 12 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers          Pull the handle of the misfeed   clearing door to open it  and then  close it                    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     10 13    1 0 Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers       10 3 Clearing a staple jam    If a staple jam occurs  the message shown Staple  node cannot be    Qpen the section jndiested  by  the arrow and follow the    below appears  instructions on the    Label       Job List       For a staple jam in the saddle stitcher  Staple moda cannot be use  Span ene Section  jndieated by  instructions on the label     Saddle Staple Cartridge 1       D FEGA    Reminder  Be careful when clearing jammed staples since injuries may result     Follow the procedure described below to clear jammed staples  If the  paper is pulled out with too much force  the stapler unit may be  damaged        10 14 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers 1 0       To clear jammed staples in finisher       1 Remove all paper from the finisher           A 3     amp  Open the front door                    Lower lever FN1  and then remove  any paper                          4 Tum dial FN2                    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  10 15    Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers       10              
134. azancasaase 1 10  Punching  holes ini COPICS sis cases  veesvenccectexcctexecuesaciceecnes eclenecueeecicnes 1 10  Center DINGING saccciisstcesscesassecvadessccansnsasecieadsatienaessnabasczaaecetaeasatacace 1 11  Copying multiple document pages onto a single page                 1 11  Copying a document containing pages of various sizes               1 11  Adjusting copies according to the image quality of the original   1 12  AdING  A COVEr pagesen ionos eiee iKa KENEAN 1 12  Adding insertions  such as colored paper  within copies              1 12  Inserting paper  interleaves  between copies of  overhead projector transparencies          sesesrissrrierrrerrresrrnsrenes 1 13  Adding a binding margin to COPIES       eeeeessesrrsesressrreerresrrresrrnserns 1 13  Erasing sections Of COPICS          eeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeseeeeeneeeeeneeteneeeenaeeees 1 14  Repeating copy   Mages          sc eeeseeeseeeeeeneeeeeneeteneeeeeeneeeeeeeennneeess 1 14  Separately copying a page spread          ee eeeeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 1 14  Copying with a layout of a book or magazine    1 15  Printing distribution numbers and StaMPS           eeeceeeseeeeeeeeees 1 15  Printing copies overlapping a different image                cceeee 1 15  Copying with black and white reversed              ccesseeeessereeseeeeees 1 16  Checking COPY JODS ius ciscccctssceetatsictadesecesteden sheets scicesanceadesuseanenccasaes 1 16  Programming Copy SettinGS            eeeeeeseeeeeeseeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeneee
135. be performed by the external server or by the  machine  With external server authentication  limitations can be placed on  the users who have access to this machine  With machine authentication  a  password can be specified for each user and their counters can be  controlled     To display the User Authentication screen    Y lf  ON  External Server   was selected in the User Authentication ON OFF  screen   External Server Authentication  appears in the  Account Authentication screen  If  ON  MFP   was selected   Machine  Auth  Setting  appears in the Account Authentication screen  For details   refer to  Specifying the account authentication settings  User  Authentication ON OFF parameters   on page 12 31    Y A maximum of 100 users can be registered on this machine     Display the Administrator Management 1 screen  and then touch    Account User Auth        For details on displaying the Administrator Management 1 screen   refer to  Displaying the Administrator Management screen  on  page 12 25    The Account Authentication screen appears     Touch  External Server Authentication  or  Account Track Setting           To exit the User Authentication  screen  touch  Enter  in each    til the Basics screen sat  screen un  Account  a  appears  a                weer    100        12 42 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode 12       The User Authentication screen for either external server authentication  or machine authentication appears              External server authent
136. bypass tray            GERLY   Application       Basics  Paver J E   EE Fae     z f A4 D lL Setting                                 3 Touch  Change Setting       p Touch  Custom Size   Select paper type and size for  the Bypass Tray     The Custom Size screen appears                 i  Hener 100      9 How can the size of paper loaded into the bypass tray be selected      gt  For details  refer to  To specify a setting for special paper  Change  Setting   on page 8 15        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  8 13    Copy paper original documents          ky    ae    Touch  Size Registration      The Size Registration screen  appears     Type in the length  X  and width  Y  of  the paper     Make sure that  X  is selected   and then use the keypad to type  in the length of side X  between  140 mm and 432 mm     Touch  Y  to select it  and then  use the keypad to type in the  length of side Y  between 90 mm  and 297 mm             a        Basics Griginais f Densaey J Application                Duplex  Cancel Enter   Size Regis   tration     ano 00       Zoom       Paper             Custom Size       i  F    X   200 mm  140 432    F       5    150 mn  0 297                                                Job List  o   Basics  52meA26   Sealy   Application  Paper Zoom Bangla  Size Registration  140 432 gu       90 297    Job List ree   100    A value outside the allowable range cannot be entered   To change the entered value  press the  C   clear  key  and then    enter the correct v
137. cifying  settings for this func   tion                 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     12 57    Utility mode       Specifying that the    Auto Paper Select    setting and the    Auto Zoom     setting can be selected at the same time  mode 403     If a paper tray is selected while the  Auto Paper Select  setting is specified   the  Auto Zoom  setting can be set automatically     Settings at time of purchase                      Bit 76543210  Setting 00000001  HEX  01   Specifying the setting    The shaded cells indicate the settings selected at the time of purchase        Bit    Description    Setting Description       0  Do not change this  bit when specifying  settings for this func   tion        Specify whether or  not the  Auto Zoom   setting is automati   cally selected     0 The  Auto Zoom  set   ting cannot be speci   fied at the same time        1 The  Auto Zoom  set   ting can be specified  at the same time        5  4  3  2  1 0             000001  Do not change these  bits when specifying  settings for this func   tion                 12 58    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode    12       Specifying the measurement units  mode 426     Specify the units used to display and specify lengths shown in the screens     Settings at time of purchase                      Bit 76543210  Setting 00000000  HEX  00   Specifying the setting    The grayed out cells are the settings at the time of purchase        Bit    Description    Setting Description       7 6 5    0
138. creen  touch  Zoom   E o co    The Zoom screen appears   Basics  Seugtaats   BYAL _   Application    Tex     Zoom Dup  000    PCintching   Mixed     Finishing 4d   Original          Job List  2 Touch  Auto Zoom   Re o co   Basics  52m2  GYAN   Application          Paper ania       XY Zoom                                                    Specifying the same zoom ratio as the document     x1 0    setting   A copy that is the same size as the document  x1 000  is produced       Y Touch to enlarge the zoom ratio  and touch    zoom ratio in x0 001 increments     to reduce the       1 In the Basics screen  touch  Zoom    The Zoom screen appears    Basics   SPSSEASe   SEALY   Application    Paper Zoon Duplex         Mixed        Finishing j   origina      Job List          MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  4 29    Basic copy operation                                  lo   2 Touch  x1 0         Basics   origeasts   Sealy   Application  Simplex       Paper Duplex     NNN ERIN                                          TE Hl reo 7            Job List       4 30 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation 4       Slightly reducing the copy     Minimal    setting     A document image can be printed slightly smaller  x0 930  than the original  document size     VY The zoom ratio of the  Minimal  setting can be changed  between x0 900  and x0 999   For details on changing the zoom ratio for the  Minimal   setting or programming custom zoom ratios  refer to  Storing the desired  zoom 
139. ction 1       Center binding  Copies can be folded at their center and bound with staples     For details  refer to  Binding copies at the center  on page 4 60                    Copying multiple document pages onto a single page  Multiple pages of the document can be printed together on a single copy     For details  refer to  Selecting a Combine Originals setting  on page 4 46           Copying a document containing pages of various sizes                   A document with pages of various sizes can be scanned and copied  together     For details  refer to  Specifying document settings  on page 4 17         a    e                   MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  1 11    Introduction       Adjusting copies according to the image quality of the original   The copies can be adjusted according to the image quality of the document   For details  refer to  Specifying document quality density settings  on   page 4 43    Adding a cover page   Cover pages can be added to copies     For details  refer to  Adding cover pages     Cover Mode    function   on    page 9 3     Adding insertions  such as colored paper  within copies                   Different paper  such as colored paper  can be inserted at specified locations  in the copies     For details  refer to  Inserting cover pages     Insert Sheet    function   on    page 9 6   ABC   ABC F                   MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Introduction 1       Inserting paper  interleaves  between copies of overhead projector  trans
140. d then specify the  setting     To specify the bits  touch  Bit  Selection   touch and   to move the cursor to the bit  to be changed  press either the   0  or  1  key in the keypad to  specify the bit  and then touch   Enter      To specify the hex value  touch   HEX Selection   specify the value  by either using the keypad or  touching  A  through  F   and then  touch  Enter         Utility Counter                   nter  Enter Jy  CSSF   Brittas   Software su   Ping J Betting    J Delete Job J     Memory q   Management      Henery 100           Soft SH Setting                   Epee 100   Soft SH Setting    Hode Selection f 403    Bit Selection   01000001                Ppr 100        Soft SH Setting    Hode Selection f 403    J                wree       100        12 54    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode 12       5 To change the setting for a different mode  repeat steps 3 and 4        Touch  Enter  in each screen until the initial screen appears     YW    7 Turn the machine off  then on again             Reminder   When turning the main power switch off  then on again  wait about 10  seconds after turning the machine off before turning it on again  The  machine may not operate correctly if it is turned on immediately after    being turned off        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  12 55    Utility mode       Specifying permissions for copy functions  mode 307     The machine can be set so that copy functions cannot be used  In this case   the Basics screen do
141. dding filing margins to copies     Page Margin    function             9 11  To copy using the    Page Margin    function            sesssseeeesseeeneeseenne 9 11  9 5 Erasing unwanted areas of copies      Edge Frame Erase    function              cccessseeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeesneeeeeneesnnes 9 13  To copy using the    Edge Frame Erase    function           eeeeeeee 9 13  9 6 Tiling copy images     Image Repeat    function              sssseeeeeees 9 15  To copy using the    Image Repeat    fUNCTION               eeeeeeeereeeeeees 9 15  9 7 Producing separate copies of each page in a page spread      Book Copy    function         sssssssssssunsnnnennnnnnnnnnnnunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnn 9 18  To copy using the    Book Copy    function   ssessssessreerrerreeresen 9 19  9 8 Creating booklet copies     Booklet    function             ccsssseeeeeseees 9 22  To copy using the    Booklet    function                ceeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeteeeeeteee 9 23  9 9 Printing additional information on copies   Image Settings FUNCTIONS         2  cccseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeesseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 9 24  To print the distribution number     Set Numbering    function          9 24  To print preset text at the center of the copy image   Stamp funtion  eaaa aa aaa aa aa dhe eed 9 26  Contents 8 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        9 10 Printing copies overlapping a different image        Image Overlay    fUNCTION           c   cceeeseeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeseneeeeeeeneeeeneees 9 27  To store an overlay imag
142. de 426               cceee 12 59  Specifying settings when copying is finished using  the ADF  mode 429  eo aeiee eeina oen eaae eaat edie aa ae SESA 12 60  Specifying the pressing of the  Access  key when  logging off  mode 438  0 2 2     eeeeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeees 12 61  Specifying use of registered user authenticationinformation  to log on to the LDAP server  mode 466                 cceceseeeeeeeeeeee 12 62  Specifying whether to enable access locks and password  rules  and specifying the method for deleting image data   mode 46I  ca a oe arearen ational Ste nee eee athens  12 63  Specifying the setting for displaying a list of users in the  User Authentication screen  mode 471              ccceeeeteeeeeteeeteeees 12 65  Specifying the deleting method for  Del   in input  screens  MOE 478            ccsssssccccecceceeeceeeesesseessesnseaeeeeeeeeeeeeeeess 12 66   MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  Contents 11       Specifying settings for limiting user authentication to       only Scan functions  mode 479            cccceeeeseeeeeeeeteeeeeeteeteeeeeeees 12 67   12 11 Specifying security settings  Security Setting parameters         12 68  Before specifying the    Enhance Security    parameter                 12 69  Parameters that are changed when    Enhance Security    is set   12 70  Specifying the    Enhance Security    parameter    12 72  Canceling an access lock     Unlock    parameter                 eeeee 12 74   To Cancel an access lock         
143. duct for    long periods of time  Z                MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        Installation and operation precautions       User instructions    CE Marking  Declaration of Conformity  for users of the European Union   EU   This product complies with the following EU directives     89 336 EEC  73 23 EEC  93 68 EEC  and 1999 5 EC directives   This declaration is valid for the area of the European Union        This device must be used with shielded  interface cables  The use of non shielded  cable is likely to result in interference with  radio communications and is prohibited  under EU directives              For users in countries subject to Class B regulations       A CAUTION    Interference with radio communications     gt  This device must be used with shielded interface cables  The use of  non shielded cable is likely to result in interference with radio  communications and is prohibited under CISPR 22 rules and local  rules        For users in countries not subject to Class B regulations         A WARNING    Interference with radio communications     gt  This is a Class A product  In a domestic environment this product may  cause radio interference in which case the user may be required to take  adequate measures     gt  This device must be used with shielded interface cables  The use of  non shielded cable is likely to result in interference with radio  communications and is prohibited under CISPR 22 rules and local  rules           MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  
144. e  Store Overlay            ceesseeesseeeeeeees 9 27  To recall an Overlay image            cecceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaaee 9 30  To check the overlay image               cceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeenaeeeeeeeeaaees 9 32  9 11 Copying with light and dark coloring inversed      B W Reverse    Setting    c cc02 cccisecscecedi cesses ctiee ect enctineect wecivescteneciee 9 34  To copy using the    B W Reverse    Setting                ccceeeseeeeeeeeeeee 9 34  9 12 Separate SCAN       ccccsseeeseeeesssenenseeeesseeeenseensseeeeeneneeenseenenseeeensennenss 9 35  To scan documents Continuously             seeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 9 35          10 1 Replacing the toner bottle             cccccsseseeeeeesseeeeeeeeeseneeneeeeseeeeeeeeeees  To replace the toner Dottle               cccssssccscccceseceeeseeseseesessssensaneees   10 2 Replacing the staple cartridge  To replace the staple cartridge in finisher                  ccseceeeeeees 10 8  To replace the staple cartridge in saddle stitchet               005 10 11   10 3 Clearing a staple jaim            ccccsssseeeeeseseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeseneeeeees 10 14  To clear jammed staples in finisher                cccceeeceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeee 10 15  To clear jammed staples in the saddle stitcher                  eeee 10 19   10 4 Emptying the waste Containers                 ccccesseseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeee 10 23  To empty the hole punch waste container               cccsceeeeeeeee 10 23   i mach   a a
145. e Low Power mode can also be canceled by opening the original  cover or loading a document into the ADF     2 The machine can receive jobs while it is warming up         The touch panel comes on again and  after the machine has  finished warming up  it is ready to begin printing  within 14 seconds  at normal room temperature  23   C       Q    Detail  The length of time until the machine enters Low Power mode can be set  from Utility mode  For details  refer to  Low Power Mode  on page 12 15        3 30 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies 3       Automatically conserving energy  Sleep mode     If no operation is performed for a specified length of time  the machine  automatically enters a mode where it conserves energy     The machine conserves more power in Sleep mode than in Low Power  mode     As the factory default  the machine enters Sleep mode after 1 minute     To recover from Sleep mode    Press any key in the control panel or touch the touch panel         The Sleep mode can also be canceled by opening the original cover  or loading a document into the ADF     2 The machine can receive jobs while it is warming up         The touch panel comes on again and  after the machine has  finished warming up  it is ready to begin printing  within 30 seconds  at normal room temperature  23   C       Q    Detail  The length of time until the machine enters Sleep mode can be set from  Utility mode  For details  refer to  Sleep Mode  on page 12 76        MP 1025 1
146. e Settings screen appears     9 Touch  Image Overlay      To cancel the Image Settings  functions  touch  OFF     The Image Overlay screen appears      amp      Touch  Recall   and then touch the  button for the number stored with the  image         To cancel the  Image Overlay   function  touch  OFF         Ready to copy     REI    F finsert  Cover Mode     sheet Hg E FS       bis    Bases  eaten a eve i  Meee ae  T                                         eee aw  Separate  Settings     Reverse   Scan    Mob List Memory 100     Ready to copy                Job List    Select an image from memory   Choose SET to customize  Positioning        i Combine f Quality  f   Semtant   Busy Application  Enter    zm  we  Oe      Job List                        Basics          Image Over lay                      9 30    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Application functions 9       5 Specify the printing position  Ready to copy       Touch the button for positioning ee  the overlay at the top  center or   In  bottom  osition Pages    ECE          Select the desired setting under  Pages        If  Pages  is set to  First page only   the overlay image is only  printed overlapping the first page of the copy  If  All Pages  is  selected  the overlay image is printed overlapping all pages        To cancel changes to the settings  touch  Cancel      Touch  Enter   and then touch  Enter  in the next two screens that  appear        Specify any other desired copy settings   Using the keypad  type 
147. e appropriate  zoom ratio is automatically recalled  when an Orig   gt  Copy setting or the   Booklet  function is used   e Recall   The zoom ratio for the  4 in 1  setting  is x0 500  and the zoom ratio for the   2 in 1  setting and the  Booklet   function is x0 707   e Do Not Recall   No zoom ratio is selected automati   cally        Recall          Low Power Mode                            Tab Parameter Description Default setting  3 6 Low Power Mode Specify the desired length of time  be  15 minutes  tween 1 and 240 minutes  until the ma   chine enters Low Power mode   MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  12 15    Utility mode             Sleep Mode  Tab Parameter Description Default setting  3 6 Sleep Mode Specify the desired length of time  be  15 minutes             tween 1 and 240 minutes  until the ma   chine enters Sleep mode              Q    Detail    If the  Disable Sleep Mode  parameter in Administrator Management is  set to  Yes    OFF  appears and users can select whether or not the Sleep  mode is disabled  For details  refer to  Disable Sleep Mode  on   page 12 30     LCD Back Light OFF                                  Tab Parameter Description Default setting  3 6 LCD Back Light Specify the desired length of time  be  1 minute  OFF tween 1 and 240 minutes  until the touch  panel automatically goes off   Auto Reset  Tab Parameter Description Default setting  3 6 Auto Reset Select the desired length of time until the   1 min              automatic panel reset operati
148. e automatically performs this operation to return all set   tings to their defaults if no operation is performed for the specified  length of time        Auto Paper Select    Select this setting to detect the document placed on the original  glass or loaded into the ADF  then automatically select paper of the  same size if  1 0  is selected or select the paper size appropriate  for the specified zoom ratio           Auto Zoom Select this setting to automatically select the appropriate zoom ratio  after a document is placed on the original glass or loaded into the  ADF and the copy paper size is selected    B W Reverse Set this function to copy the document with the light  and dark     colored areas or the gradations of the image inversed        Center Erase    Select this setting to print copies with the center  fold  of the docu   ment erased           Change Tray Settings Touch this button to specify a paper size not loaded in a paper tray  or to copy on paper other than plain paper   Chapters Set this function to specify chapter title pages that must be printed    on the front side of the paper when printing double sided copies        Combine Originals    Select a setting to arrange reduced copies of multiple document  pages on a single copy page  The settings for the number of pages  that can be combined are  2 in 1    4 in 1  and  8 in 1            Cover Mode Set this function to add paper from the specified paper tray to the  copies as a cover page   Density Select a se
149. e desired image  added    Set the  Set Numbering  function to print copies with a distribution  number in the background    Set the  Stamp  function to print copies with one of the preset  stamps  such as  TOP SECRET    COPY  or  PROOF     Set the  Image Overlay  function to print copies overlapping a differ   ent scanned image                 Insert Image Set this function to later scan multiple images from the original glass  and insert them at the desired locations in a document scanned with  the ADF  then feed out all copies together    Insert Sheet Set this function to insert paper from the specified paper tray into the  copies as chapter title pages    Job The copy operation that is queued on the machine while copying   Multiple jobs can be queued on the machine    LCT Optional paper feed cabinet that can be loaded with up to 2 500    sheets of paper        Low Power Mode    The machine automatically enters this mode  where it conserves en   ergy  if no operation is performed for the specified length of time  In  this mode  the touch panel go off        Margin    Select the setting for the position of the binding margin for the load   ed document  Selecting the appropriate setting prevents the copy  from being printed upside down when making double sided copies  from single sided documents or when making single sided copies  from double sided documents           Memory Scan       Scans a document exceeding the maximum 80 pages that can be  loaded into the ADF by scannin
150. easbenaaceaceses 12 14  Priority Tray secs ieiccesseaceiaecassieesdaceecaiscacasnisnatnessecatasdeaeraanstavesetaeasiee 12 14  Special Paper Setting sasae eaaa arrana aeaa anea ERa daa ariani 12 15  Zoom Ratio for Combine Booklets                  cccceeeeceeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 12 15  Pow Power Mode aaa aa aranana eaa aaa aaea aE Daaa 12 15  Sleep  Modeni  aiiai vite Ae i ee 12 16  LCD Back LightOFF  28 sisel nana ae 12 16  Auto  R6S6t ti ene a Siea ii avid ee 12 16  Auto Reset when Account iS Changed             cceeesseeeeseeeeesneeteeees 12 16  dint Copy Order areen a nunca nla end 12 17  Default Quality Density Modes 1 0    eeeeeeereeesneeeeeneeteeeeeeeeeeeene 12 17  Default Copy Output Level s             ccccccsceeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeneeeees 12 17  Print  Density  2 22 26  aaa cee  sa ect e a sige ia et aa foseeeat teed sven Pots 12 17  Default Finishing Mode              2 c  ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaeeeees 12 18  Sort Non Sort Auto Change          ceecessseeeeeneeeeeneeeeeseeeesnneeeeneeees 12 18  Output Tray Settings  spissi iiipin pattiat anidar inaari iar 12 19  Auto Paper Select for Small Orig      eseesseeesreessissrreerrrerrrrerrnsrrrees 12 20  Crease Center Staple  00         cccccceeceseeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeas 12 20  Default Screen snared o a eane aa TE Eaa eTa 12 21  Default DEVICE  oaia iraina ieee hoe ade aana iana 12 22  Image Quality  ADF  sssrinin a 12 22  12 3 Specifying User Management settings                 scccssseeeee
151. eceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeaeeeeeeseneeeeeeeeeaaes 4 62   4 12 Stopping deleting a jOD            ccccssseeeeeesseseeeeeeseeseeeeeeesseeeeeeeeseenene 4 63   To stop delete a COPY job           ceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeeeaee 4 63  MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  Contents 5       5 1    5 2    5 3    5 4    5 5    5 6    5 7    6 1    6 2    Checking the copy settings  Mode Check              ccssssseeeeeeseseenees 5 3    To check the SettingS              eccecceceeeseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaneeeeeeeeaee 5 3  To change the Settings ms cies ek Aan een eae 5 5  Printing a sample to check the settings  Proof Copy           0 s008 5 6  TO Make test Pints arreire ieai enn eniaint aiiai e Ea 5 6  Interrupting a copy job  Interrupt mode         ssssssnssseunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 5 8  TO  iNterrupt a COPY JOD aerea eean eia ta aaraa aoaeiaa iaaa dinana 5 8  Registering copy programs  Mode Memory           ssssususnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 5 9  To register a COPY program           cccceeesceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneaeeeeetees 5 9  To recall A COPY PrOGraM            eeccceceeeseneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeees 5 11  To checking the Copy SettiNGS               ccceeseeteeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 12  To delete a registered COPY program          eeeeeeeseeeeeneeteeneeeeeeees 5 14  Specifying control panel settings  Accessibility mode                 5 15  To display the Accessibility Settings SCreeN             eseeeseeeeeeeees 5 15  To set the    Screen M
152. echnical representative screen     Malfunction detected   Please call your Technical  Representative           MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  6 3    6 Troubleshooting       To correct the error    1 Write down the malfunction code  for example  C 0001  in the call  technical representative screen    2 Turn the machine off by using the  Power   auxiliary power  key and the  main power switch                             3 Unplug the machine     4 Contact the technical representative  and inform them of the  malfunction code      amp         Reminder   Since the machine may be damaged  contact the technical  representative according to the procedure described above as soon as  the call technical representative screen appears        6 4 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Troubleshooting 6       6 2 When the message    Misfeed detected     appears    If a misfeed occurs during copying or printing  the message  Misfeed  detected   appears and the location of the misfeed is indicated in the screen    misfeed screen    At this time  copying and printing cannot continue until the misfeed is  adequately cleared     Location of paper misfeed     x  indicates the location of the paper Micteod dotontad    misfeed  In addition  a lit    O    indicates Renove misfeed Indicated at O   areas where paper may have been misfed  and that should be checked    Example  Screen when a paper misfeed  occurs in a paper tray    XQ       Note  The procedure for clearing misfed paper differs depending on whe
153. ecifying the document orientation  refer to  Selecting the  document orientation  Original Direction settings   on page 4 20    VY For details on using the original glass to scan multiple document pages   refer to  Scanning a multi page document from the original glass  on  page 4 15     1 In the Basics screen  touch Re o co   Simplex Duplex        Basics iA   Quality A Application    The Simplex Duplex screen appears     Paper Zoom Burp lax    Peres Mixed i  Finishing j   origina      Job List emery 100          2 Select the double sided copy  settings according to the loaded                                                       d  Basics  SPISEARE  SY  ALY   Application  gcument  Paper      Zoon Bingle        For a single sided document  Orig    Copy  touch  Single Sided  under    P   Orig   and  Double Sided  under o GE   Copy           Fora double sided document  i  touch  Double Sided  under sob List o      Orig   and  Double Sided  under  Copy         4 42 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation 4       4 8 Specifying document quality density settings    Select the setting for the text and image type of the document to better  adjust the copy quality     The following Quality Density settings are available     Document Quality Types       Icon Description       Select this setting when copying documents containing only    text   The edges of copied text are reproduced with sharpness   providing text that is easy to read        Select this setting when copy
154. ection      The Domain Name screen appears     a    O Type in the domain name  and then  Donain Nane  eancel_J fenter_    touch  Enter     E   If  NDS  was selected in the BHGHERKETonamn  Authentication System screen  ARBBBAIHH   Tree Name  and  Context Name  ZBZKREENMAJ  appear instead of  Domain AE  Name   Touch  Tree Name  or ae Pavers   Context Name   type in the tree  Aipha _  caps                                          name or context name  and then    touch  Enter     For details on the domain name  tree name  and context name   refer to the User manual  Network Scanner Operations     To cancel changes to the settings  touch  Cancel     For details on typing in text  refer to  Entering text  on page 13 3     The Domain Setting screen appears again     Touch  Enter      The User Authentication screen appears again        Touch  Enter      To exit the Account Authentication screen  touch  Enter  in each  screen until the Basics screen appears     The external server user is registered        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  12 45    12 Utility mode       To register a user with machine authentication  A user can be registered when machine authentication is used     Y A maximum of 100 users can be registered on this machine     Display the User Authentication screen for machine authentication         For details on displaying the User Authentication screen  refer to   Specifying user authentication settings  on page 12 42     eee    A screen for selecting a user number   U
155. ee digit number for the parameter that you wish  to specify with the software switch settings        Bit Selection The bits are the eight numbers that construct the mode  By  specifying a binary number  0 or 1  for each of the bits  0  through 7   each function can be specified        HEX Selection Specify a setting for each mode as a hexadecimal number  0  through 9 and A through F     For example  to specify the bit setting  0011 0000   specify  the hexadecimal setting  30                     12 52    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode    12       Reference  Examples of  Bit Selection  binary numbers and  HEX Selection     hexadecimal numbers                                                                         Decimal number  Bit Selection  setting  bina    HEX Selection  setting  ry number   hexadecimal number   0 0000 0000 00  1 0000 0001 01  2 0000 0010 02  3 0000 0011 03  4 0000 0100 04  5 0000 0101 05  6 0000 0110 06  7 0000 0111 07  8 0000 1000 08  9 0000 1001 09  10 0000 1010 0A  11 0000 1011 0B  12 0000 1100 oc  13 0000 1101 oD  14 0000 1110 0E  15 0000 1111 OF  16 0001 0000 10  255 1111 1111 FF             MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     12 53    Utility mode       To specify a software switch setting    Enter Administrator mode  and then touch  Admin  2      Touch  Software SW    The soft SW setting screen appears     Touch  Mode Selection   and then  use the keypad to type in the mode  number     Touch either  Bit Selection  or  HEX  Selection   an
156. eeeeeeeetees 3 58       4 1 General Copy Operation               ccccessseeeceeeeseeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeessseeeeeeeseeneees 4 3  RO  make a COPY wresastra ia eae aces ee sate in acta ese 4 3  4 2 Operations that cannot be COMbINE               ccccceseeeeeeeeeesneeeeeeeeeees 4 6  Operations where the setting specified last is given priority            4 6  Operations where the setting specified first is given priority           4 8  4 3 Feeding the document               cccessseeeeeeeesseeeeeeeeseneneeeeeesseeeeeeeeeesnenees 4 9  To load the document into the ADF             essseeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeee 4 9  To place the document on the original glaSS           seeeseeeeeees 4 11  Scanning a document in separate batches      Separate Scan    Setting     eeeeceeeseeeessneeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeeeeneeeeneeeeee 4 13  Scanning a multi page document from the original glass             4 15  44 Specifying document SettingS               eccessseeeeeessseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeseeees 4 17  Copying documents of mixed sizes     Mixed Original    setting       4 17  To copy documents with the    Mixed Original    setting                  4 18  Selecting the document orientation  Original Direction settings    4 20  To select an Original Direction Setting   00 0    eee eeseeeeeseeeeeneeeeeneees 4 21  Selecting the position of the binding margin  Margin settings       4 22  To select a Margin Setting             cccccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 23  45 Selecting a Paper Setting     
157. een disappears  and the Basics screen appears     Make copies using the desired copy settings     When you are finished printing  press  the  Access  key     A message appears  requesting  confirmation to log off     Touch  Yes   and then touch  Enter      The User Authentication screen  appears        Access  Cire    O       Are you sure you want to Log out                   Yes         Caroline  0001    User Name  Account Name                    Hemor   Free      100        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     3 45    3 Before making copies    Q    Detail   External server authentication and account track settings can be  specified in Administrator mode  available from the Utility mode  Settings  should be specified by the administrator     XQ       Note  If machine authentication settings have been specified with user  authentication  it can be synchronized with account track         f user authentication and account track are synchronized  log on from  the user authentication screen to display the Basics screen  For details   refer to  Controlling machine use with user authentication  machine  authentication  and account track synchronized  on page 3 51        3 46 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies 3       Controlling machine use with user authentication  machine  authentication  and account track    If user authentication settings have been specified and accounts have been  registered by the administrator  the use of this machine by that user can be  mana
158. en a different paper tray is automatically selected  the  next paper tray in the following list is chosen     1st tray  gt  2nd tray  gt  3rd tray LCT  gt  4th tray  gt  Bypass tray       MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  8 9    Copy paper original documents                                                               8 2 Specifying paper settings for the bypass tray  This section describes the procedures for specifying the size and type of  paper loaded in the bypass tray   Detail  For details on loading the paper into the bypass tray  refer to  Loading  paper into the bypass tray  on page 3 58   To specify the paper size  Change Setting   Standard paper sizes can be specified for the paper loaded into the bypass  tray   This is useful  for example  when the size of the paper that is loaded cannot  be automatically detected  such as with paper in inch sizes    1 Load the paper into the bypass tray   2 Inthe Basics screen  touch  Paper    The Paper screen appears    Basics   SP SEASE   SEALY   Application  Paper Zoon Duplex     Finishing Wisin  Job List enor 400  3 Select the button for the bypass tray    Basics  57m6  SuAut   Application  Paper Zoom Duplex  Basm EXE  PE  AAD  68s  A4 D    Job List   00  4 Touch  Change Setting    8 10 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Copy paper original documents 8          Select the size of paper loaded into Select paper type and size for  the Bypass Tray     the bypass tray         How can the size of paper loaded    into the bypass tray be 
159. en appears again        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  4 39    Basic copy operation       4 7 Selecting single  double sided settings for originals    and copies    The following four combinations of the  Single Sided  and  Double Sided   settings are available originals and copies        Original copy settings    Description       Single Sided  gt  Single Sided       Select this setting to produce single sided copies from sin   gle sided documents     a e       Single Sided  gt  Double Sided       Select this setting to produce one double sided copy from  two single sided documents     2348          Double Sided  gt  Single Sided       Select this setting to produce two single sided copies from  one double sided document     go          Double Sided  gt  Double Sided             Select this setting to produce double sided copies from  double sided documents     O  2 9          4 40    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        Basic copy operation 4       To select single sided copies    Y Asa factory default  the  Single Sided  Original setting and the  Single   Sided  Copy setting are selected     vY lf the  Double Sided  Original setting and the  Single Sided  Copy  setting are selected  specify the position of the binding margin and the  loading orientation for the document  otherwise the copies will not be  printed as desired  For details on specifying the position of the binding  margin  refer to  Selecting the position of the binding margin  Margin  settings   on page 4 22  F
160. endix    13 1 Entering text    This section contains details on using the keyboard that appears in the touch  panel for typing in passwords and text to register one touch recipients  The  keypad can also be used to type in numbers     The following procedure describes how to enter characters in the User Name  screen when registering users for user authentication   To type text     gt  Inthe keyboard that appeared  touch  User wane  the button for the desired character  Pee Smmm sci                                            Numbers can also be typed in     T ome oe EG TEA  aeaa E ajamana aa       To type in uppercase letters  aie Dgn  BEOVENMOIO    touch  Caps      To cancel Caps mode  touch   Caps  again     BIC                   Herer 100    amp         Note  To cancel the entered text  touch  Cancel      To clear all entered text  press the  C   clear  key        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  13 3    1 3 Appendix       Q    Detail  To switch between entering letters or symbols  touch the button for    switching the input mode        To change a character in the entered text  touch        and    _  to move  the cursor to the character to be changed  touch  Del    and then type in  the desired letter or number     The software switch settings can be used to change how characters are  deleted  For details on the software switch settings  refer to  Specifying  software switch settings  machine functions   on page 12 52      f the number of characters exceeds the limit allowed 
161. er Name Caroline  Account Name   0001          Honor 100     Q    Detail  For details on specifying settings for machine authentication  refer to   Specifying account data settings  on page 12 34     For details on logging on when external server authentication settings  have been specified  refer to  Controlling machine use with user  authentication  external server authentication   on page 3 36     Machine authentication settings can be specified using the User  Authentication parameters in Administrator Management  available from  the Utility mode  Settings should be specitied by the administrator     Note   If Administrator mode settings have been specified with machine  authentication to display a list of user names  the desired user name can  be selected from a list     Touch  User List   touch the button for the desired user name to select it   and then touch  OK      However  if  Enhance Security  has been set to  ON    User List  does  not appear        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  3 53    3 Before making copies       3 4 Loading paper into the 1st or 2nd tray    Follow the procedure described below to load paper into the 1st and 2nd  trays or into the optional double paper feed cabinet  8rd and 4th trays      To load paper  1st or 2nd tray   Pull out the paper tray to be loaded with paper     Slide the lateral guides to fit the size  of paper to be loaded           Load the paper into the tray so that  the side of the paper to be printed on   the side facing up whe
162. eration is called a job  In  the same way  operations for making scans and computer printouts are also  queued as jobs   e Jobs that are being performed and jobs that are queued can be checked  or deleted from the Job List screens   e Jobs are printed starting with the one at the top of the Print Order list   Multi job feature  While one job is being printed  another job can be queued  A maximum of 5  copy jobs can be queued   When one job is finished being printed  the next queued print job  automatically begins   Job List screens  In the Job List screen  the following tabs Job List 2 24 17 17  for various specific functions can be Nob  eric Dprint  type  poc  1  displayed  Status User Nane Revd  e Job  Lists the operations that are being    ggeier Read  U  1373    performed  Serie  J   a  e Print Order  Lists the order of  Dialing JEN 2nd Dest 15 53  documents that are being copied or    Sending JEM atesakiasta _ t8185  printed or waiting to be copied or ly  printed  dob List  ARS e Menory 707   e Print  Lists the print status of  documents being copied or printed  e Type  Used in Fax mode  e Doc   Used in Fax mode and Box mode  Detail  For details on the Com  tab of the Job List screen  refer to the User  manual  Facsimile Operations    For details on the Doc  tab of the Job List screen  refer to the User manual   Facsimile Operations  and the User manual  Box Operations    5 22 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Additional copy operations 5       5 7 Performing operations o
163. es     Press the  Start  key   Copying begins        9 34 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Application functions 9       9 12 Separate scan    The machine can be set to continue scanning the document     To scan documents continuously         gt  Touch  Application   and then touch ESE   Separate Scan        To cancel the  Separate Scan  me  setting  touch  Separate Scan  m M i  again to deselect it                                          Bage      Edge Frame     Book Copy7  Margin Erase Repeat d    PA Ma   Trg Br  Separate  Settings jj   Reverse Scan    Mob List Memory 100                          Q    Detail  For details on continuously scanning documents  refer to  Scanning a  document in separate batches     Separate Scan    setting   on page 4 13        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  9 35    9 Application functions          9 36 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        1 O Replacing toner bottles    and staples and emptying  punch waste containers       Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers 1 0       nn      10 Replacing toner bottles and staples and  emptying punch waste containers    10 1 Replacing the toner bottle    When the toner is about to run out  the  advanced warning message shown below  appears      Combine  Quality      Originais   Density    Application    Simplex   Zoon Bup Lex       Q  Job List  Detail  First  the message    Please exchange toner   appears  and then the  message  There is no Toner   appears and the machine stop
164. es 1 16  Checking the Copy settings          eecceeeseeeeseeeeesneeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeae 1 16  Enlarging the size of text in touch panel screens    s    1 16  Interrupting a COPY JOD    eee eeeeeeeseeeeeseeeeeneeeeeneeeeeaeeeesneeereeeees 1 16  Printing    proof COPY sssr eoar en naa a rI 1 17  Saving COpy dOCUMEN  S           eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteneeeeeeaeeeeeneeteneeeeeeaeeeeeas 1 17       MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  Contents 1       1 4 Explanation of manual conventionS       ss essssusssnnssnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn 1 18       Safety  AAVICES wi siaceveeiets eceeda eap a S det ecdeeda E edanan aa aaan 1 18  Sequence of ACtONskain aeaaee iana a 1 18  PPS E E EA E T E E A 1 19  Special text markings         escceeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeneeeeseeeeenaeeseeeeeeeneeeeees 1 19  1 5 User m  n  al S an aceestecs ce cncteccceccecieccpeccesceeie cece chccleeceectieceedeestcaeceds 1 20  User manual  Copy Operations   this manual              eee 1 20  User manual  Network Scanner Operations                    cceeeeee 1 20  User manual  Box Operations              eesceesseeeeseeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeenes 1 20  User manual  Print Operations               c ccsceeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaes 1 20  Quick Guide  Print Operations                ceceeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeee 1 20  User manual  Advanced Scan Operations                ccsesceeeeeeees 1 20  User manual  Facsimile Operations                cceeeceeesseeeeseeeeeeneeeeees 1 21  1 6 Descriptions and symbols for documents and papet
165. es 4 41  To select double sided COPIeS              ssssccccccceeceeessesessessesesseeees 4 42   4 8 Specifying document quality density settingS                 csssseee 4 43  Specifying a document quality Setting               ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 4 44  Adjusting the copy density  Density settings                   cceeeeee 4 45   49 Selecting a Combine Originals Setting                  cccsssseeeeeseeeeeee 4 46  Copying multiple document pages onto a single page   Combined Copy SettinGS             ccccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeseceeeeeeeseeseeees 4 49   4 10 Selecting finishing for COPIES               cccssseeeeeeeeseseeeeeesseneeeeeeneeeees 4 50  Separating copies by sets     Sort    setting     4 54  Separating copies by pages     Group    Setting    0 0    eeeeeeeeeeee 4 55  Stapling copies  Staple settings               ccceeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeneeees 4 56  To bind copies with staples  2          c ccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaee 4 57  Punching holes in copies  punch settings                ccceceeeeeeeeeeeeee 4 58  To punch holes iN COPICS wivecienieesecieeiiee deck cvvavecesaeeneseelecebeeeaieas 4 58  Binding copies at the center             c cccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeteeteeeeeeeeeaee 4 60  To bind copies at the Center           cccccccscccccccceeeeeseseessessssssssstteeeees 4 60   4 11 Scanning the next document during printing    reserving   a    copy jOb   sirisser ssectecrte tee caves eect teeter en 4 62  TO reserve a COPY JOD 0 2    eeeeecce
166. es not appear  even after the  Copy  key is pressed     Settings at time of purchase                      Bit 76543210  Setting 00000000  HEX  00   Specifying the setting    The shaded cells indicate the settings selected at the time of purchase        Bit    Description    Setting Description       Specify whether or  not copy functions  can be used     0 Specifies that copy  functions can be  used        1 Specifies that copy  functions cannot be  used        6  5  4  3  2  1 0             0000000  Do not change these  bits when specifying  settings for this func   tion                 12 56    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode       Specifying the enlarged display method  mode 311     Specify the method for displaying enlargements of screens     Settings at time of purchase                      Bit 76543210  Setting 00000000  HEX  00   Specifying the setting    The shaded cells indicate the settings selected at the time of purchase                             Bit Description Setting Description     ee       0  Do not change this  bit when specifying  settings for this func   tion    6 Specify whether to 0 Waits for instructions  enlarge the upper left on the area of the  corner of the screen screen to be dis   or wait for instruc  played enlarged   tions on the area to  display enlarged 1 Enlarges the upper   when the  Enlarge left corner of the  Display  key is screen   pressed    5 4 3 2 1 0                          000000  Do not change these   bits when spe
167. eseeeeees 12 23  To specify user management SettingS               cccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 12 23  TONE volume parameters  eieiei einean aaiae aaea aseak 12 24  Panel Cle    iNg vonina ea r e E ENT cries 12 24  Toner Suppl Vka a a hs aaea a As See Bee aaa 12 24  12 4 Displaying the Administrator Management screen    12 25  To display the Administrator Management screen      eee 12 25  12 5 Specifying Initial Settings                  eecesssseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeseeeees 12 27  To specify initial SCttINGS          eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeesaeeeteneeteaes 12 27  Date  amp  Time Setting          eeccesceeeeeeceeeeeeceesereeesseeeseeeeeseeeeseseneeessees 12 28       Contents 10 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5           12 6 Specifying Administrator SettingS          ccssseesseeesseesseensenenees 12 29  To specify administrator SettingS              ccccceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeee 12 29  Administrator Code INDut              cccceceeeeeeneeeeeeeecueeeeeeeeneeeeeeeenaee 12 30  Max  Copy S618    a r a ra E apaa a peg eee een 12 30  Disable Sleep Mode            2 csccccceeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeeneeeeeeees 12 30   12 7 Specifying the account authentication settings    User Authentication ON OFF parameters               cssssseceesesees 12 31  To specify the account authentication settings            eee 12 31  User Authentication ON OFF            eesseeesseeeeseeeeeseeeeeneeeeeneeeeee 12 33  Allow Print without Authentication            ce eeeeesseeeesneeee
168. etails on loading documents  of mixed sizes  refer to  Copying  documents of mixed sizes      Mixed Original    setting   on  page 4 17        For details on selecting the  orientation of the document  refer  to  Selecting the document  orientation  Original Direction  settings   on page 4 20                       Document scales                 For details on specifying the binding margin position  refer to   Selecting the position of the binding margin  Margin settings   on    page 4 22        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation 4       To place the document on the original glass    Vv    Vv    For details on the types of documents that can be placed on the original  glass  refer to  Original documents  on page 8 17    When placing the document on the original glass  be sure to lift open the  original cover or ADF at least 15      If the document is placed on the original glass without the original cover  or ADF being lifted at least 15    the correct document size will not be  detected    Do not place objects weighing more than 2 kg on the original glass  In  addition  do not press down extremely hard on a book spread placed on  the original glass  otherwise the original glass may be damaged    For thick books or large objects  make the copy without closing the  original cover or ADF  When a document is being scanned with the  original cover or ADF open  do not look directly at the light that may shine  through the original glass  Although the light that 
169. etscape N avigator   is a registered trademark of Netscape Corp    Pentium   is a registered trademark of Intel Corporation    Energy STAR   isa registered trademark of the U S  Environmental Protection  Agency  EPA      Products in this publication are referred to by their general trade names  In most   if not all cases  these designations are claimed as trademarks or registered  trademarks of their respective companies     Oc   MP1020 25 35  Phase 2 5            S  Contents    1 Introduction    1 1 Energy Star  sicc2  cscsinscccccnesteesscindtnnecncenccsseccnisecedessidnscedentseneceueseasentecs 1 4  What is an ENERGY STAR   Product            ec ceeeseeeesneeeseeeeeeeeteeee 1 4   1 2 Trademarks and registered trademarkKs             cccsssseeeeesseeeeteeeees 1 5  License iNfOrMatiOn           cceseseeesneeeeseeeeeeeeteeneeeeeaeeeeeaeeeesaeeeeeeeeeee 1 5  OpenSSL Statement   0 0 0    eeesceeeseeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseneeeeesaeeeesneeeeseees 1 6   1 3 Available features        ss nsssunssunnenunnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnnn nnmnnn na 1 9  Automatically selecting the Paper    eeseeeessseeeeneeeeeeeeeeneeeesaes 1 9  Adjusting copies to the size of the paper           eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeees 1 9  Specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios                 1 9  Scanning the document in separate batches             eeeeeereeeeees 1 9  Sorting COPIES  htt waar identi 1 10  Stapling COPICS iii sais case cceacaesvaiesieacanectasuceasastczaatsanasareanssder
170. etter or number  being repeated  such as  00000000   cannot be regis   tered        Passwords that the password    rules apply to       Password    Operations that use passwords       Administrator password    Used when specifying Administrator Management set   tings        Account track password    Used when logging on after account track settings have  been specified        Box password    For details on the box operations  refer to the User man   ual  Box Operations         Confidential document password    For details on confidential document operations  refer to  the User manual  Box Operations         User authentication user password          Used when logging on after user authentication settings  have been specified              12 78    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode 12    Q    Detail  When the password rules are applied  the characters that can be used  and the number of digits in each password are limited        Be sure that the administrator password that is specified is an  administrator access code that meets the password rules  If  Aaministrator mode is entered using an administrator password that  does not meet the password rules and enhanced security features are  applied  it will no longer be possible to enter Administrator mode  For  details  contact your technical representative        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  12 79    12 Utility mode          12 80 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        1 3 Appendix       Appendix 1 3       OO aa  13 App
171. etting       5 6          Auto Paper Select  for Small Original       Select whether or not to specify a paper  tray when the  Auto Paper Select  set   ting is selected and either no document  is placed on the original glass or the doc   ument placed on the original glass is  smaller than A5   e ON   Copies are produced using the paper  given priority   e Prohibit Copy   The screen for selecting a paper tray  is displayed        ON          Crease Center Staple                   Select a paper size to be set  and then  touch  Enter    e Crease   Specify the position of the fold  be   tween  10 and  10    e Center Staple   Specify the position of the center sta   ple  between  10 and  10         Tab Parameter Description Default setting  5 6 Crease  Specify the crease and center staple po   Crease  0  Center Staple sition for each paper size  Center Staple  0          eee    Note    The  Crease Center Staple  parameter appears only if optional finisher or  saddle stitcher is installed        12 20    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode       Default Screen                Tab Parameter Description Default setting  6 6 Default Default Select one of the following as the   Copy  Screen LCD mode screen given priority   Screen Copy  E Mail  Scanner  Default E    Select one of the following as the   One Touch  mail Fax mode screen given priority   Screen One Touch  Search  Address In   put                   XQ       Note  The names of parameters and settings may be differen
172. ex only    11  does not appear   For details  contact your technical repre   sentative   122  222  121  Auto Paper Auto Zoom  Tab Parameter Description Default Setting  2 6 Auto Paper Auto Select one of the following as the default   Auto Paper Select  Zoom setting   Auto Paper Select  Auto Zoom  Manual  Priority Tray  Tab Parameter Description Default Setting  2 6 Priority Tray Select which of the four paper trays is 1st tray             given priority when the  Auto Paper Se   lect  setting is not selected                 12 14    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode       Special Paper Setting                   Tab Parameter Description Default setting  2 6 Special Paper Set    One of the following special paper set  Normal  ting tings can be selected for each paper    tray  A paper tray set for special paper is  not selected automatically when the   Auto Paper Select  setting is specified  or when the automatic paper tray   switching operation is performed and its  priority order is not changed    Normal  Single Sided Only  Recycled   Special Paper                     Note     f a special setting is specified for a paper tray  the icon for the special    paper setting appears on the button for the paper tray     Q    Detail    For details on the special paper  refer to  Special paper  on page 8 6     Zoom Ratio for Combine Booklets       Tab Parameter    Description    Default setting       2 6 Zoom Ratio for  Combine Booklets             Select whether or not th
173. ey   Copying begins        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  9 17    9 Application functions       9 7 Producing separate copies of each page in a page  spread     Book Copy    function     A page spread  such as in an open book or catalog  can be copied with the  left and right pages on separate pages or both on the same page     In addition  settings can be specified for the  Page Order  and  Book Erase   functions  The following Book Copy settings are available        Setting Description       Separation Separate copies of each page in the page spread is printed in  the document page order  The document is scanned to fit the  size of paper that will be used           Book Spread Both pages of the page spread are printed on the same page                  a      With the  Separation   i gt  setting    With the  Book Spread  setting          9 18 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Application functions 9       To copy using the    Book Copy    function    Y Place the document on the original glass     1 Place the book on the original glass         For details on positioning the document  refer to  Feeding the  document  on page 4 9     Z Load the paper to be used into the desired paper tray                                                                                       Touch  Application   and then touch EAA   Book Copy Repeat            The Book Copy Repeat screen  e  za  appears    Cover Hode     inse i   Pier leave   el r        H  Ears  _      FEE    ed A MA   EEr A E  4 
174. feed cabinet PC 202 3 77   Job separator JS 502 7 70 7 7  Paper feed cabinet PC 402 3 77     7 7  LCD back light off 3 32 Paper misfeed 6 5  6 6  LOT 3 56 Paper settings 8 70  Legal restrictions on copying 7 23 Paper sizes 8 3  Low power mode 3 30 Paper storage 8 8  M Paper types 8 5  Machine authentication 3 33  3 57  Partnames  3 a  12 42 Password rule 72 63  12 68  12 78  Mailbin kit MT 501 3 73 Periodic maintenance 77 7  Main power switch 3 24 Power source 2 23  Margin settings 4 22  9 11 Programs 5 9  Memory management 72 76 Proof copy 5 6  Messages 6 32 Punch unit PU 501 3 14  Minimal setting 4 37 Punch waste container 70 23  Mixed original setting 4 77 Punched holes 4 52  Mode memory 5 9 Q  N Quality 4 43  Non sort setting 4 50 Queuing copy jobs 4 62  13 9 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     13    Appendix       R    B    Replacing staple cartridge 70 8   Replacing toner bottle 70 3  10 5   Reverse automatic document feeder DF 605 3 70  7 5    Q  v    Saddle stitcher SD 502 3 13  Safety information 2 3  Separate scan setting 4 73  9 35  Set numbering function 9 24  Set zoom 4 38   Settings 5 3   Simplex duplex 4 40  Single sided copies 4 47  Sleep 3 37   Software switch settings 72 52  Sort setting 4 57  4 54  Special paper 8 6  8 75  Stamp function 9 24   Staple jam 70 75   Stapling 4 52  4 56        Troubleshooting 6 28   U   User authentication 3 33  3 57  12 31  12 42  User choice settings 72 72    User management settings 72 23  Utility mode 72 3    wM    Warm up 3 2
175. figured into a  computer network   For details  refer to the User manual  Advanced  Scan Operations         14 Hard Disk HD 504     Increases the number of document pages to be  scanned  In addition  multiple jobs can be  scanned        15 Expanded Memory Unit EM   303 304 305     By expanding the memory  the number of  scanned pages that can be stored in the mem   ory can be increased    Referred to as the  expansion memory   throughout the manual        16 Fax Multi Line ML 502     Installed to increase the telephone lines availa   ble for faxing       17 Dehumidifier Heater 1C     Installed in the paper feed cabinet or desk to  prevent humidity from collecting in the paper       18 Local Interface Kit EK 502     Used for making a local connection between  this machine and the computer       19 Mount Kit MK 709     Installs the device to remotely control the ma   chine  If the fax kit is installed  this option is not  needed        20 Stamp Unit SP 501     Used installed on the ADF  Stamps scanned document pages to indicate  that they have been faxed       21 Security Kit SC 504              Installed to encrypt the data saved on the hard  disk so that the hard disk can be used more  safely           Parts marked with an asterisk     are internal options and therefore are not    shown in the illustration        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     3 5    Before making copies       Outside of machine                                                                                
176. ft partition glass by  wiping it with a soft  dry cloth                 XQ       Reminder  Never use solvents  such as benzene or thinner  to clean the Left partition  glass        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  11 5    1 1 Care of the machine       11 2 Viewing counters  Total Counter     The Total Counter screen can be displayed so that the total number of prints  since counting started can be viewed     To view the counters  1 Press the  Utility Counter  key     2 Touch  Check Detail      Utility Counter    oe e ee Total   Setting     Management   Counter    0    vy A Total Copy  Admin  i    Management  Reports 4 Counter    0    ce rene  Printer i  Setting   Copy Size                               The Counter screen appears  Uti l ity Counter   Counter    3 Touch  Exit   and then touch  Enter  in  the next screen that appears  Total    Total Large Size    0   The Basi i  e basic screen appears again  Total Copy CO   0    Large Size Copy                    Total Print 0  Homer 100     Wax     Note  In the Counter screen  touch  Fwd  to display the next screen  or touch   Back  to display the previous screen        11 6 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Care of the machine    11       11 3 When the message    Preventative Maintenance is  required     appears    If the message  Preventative Maintenance  is required   appears  contact your service  representative and request a periodic py Maintenance js required   maintenance inspection  ygsted Below   ANG Provide the code    li
177. g the document in separate batches   The document can be scanned and treated as a single copy job  In  addition  the scanning location can be switched between the original  glass and the ADF during the scanning operation              13 6    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     13    Appendix                   Term Definition   Minimal Select this setting to produce a copy with the original image slightly  reduced    Mixed Original Select this setting to detect the size of each document page and  print a copy on paper of the appropriate size when a document with  different page sizes is loaded together into the ADF    Offset Select this setting to separate copies that are fed out        OHP Interleave    Set this function to insert paper between overhead projector trans   parencies that are being copied    This prevents overhead projector transparencies from sticking to   gether        Paper    Select settings for the type and size of paper to be printed on        Password rules    Strict conditions for limiting passwords  for example  passwords  consisting of the same character repeated cannot be specified and  passwords must contain 8 or more characters              Proof Copy Press this key to print a single sample copy and stop the machine so  that it can be checked before printing a large number of copies  This  prevents copy errors from occurring in a large number of copies    Punch Select the setting to punch holes in the copies for filing    Quality Select the setting for
178. ge was unwrapped   faces up       Do not load so many sheets that  the top of the stack is higher than  the    mark  A maximum of 2 500  sheets can be loaded                           How is curled paper loaded    gt  Flatten the paper before loading it        3 56 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies 3          Load the paper into the left side of  the LCT so that the side of the paper  to be printed on  the side facing up  when the package was unwrapped   faces up                 5 Close the LCT     XQ       Reminder  Be careful not to touch the Film with your hands     Q    Detail  For details on the paper that can be loaded into the LCT  refer to  Copy  paper original documents  on page 8 3     Woa    Note    f the machine has entered Sleep mode  the LCT cannot be pulled out   even after the tray release button is pressed  Be sure to first cancel Sleep  mode        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  3 57    3 Before making copies       3 6 Loading paper into the bypass tray    Paper can be fed manually through the bypass tray if you wish to copy onto  paper that is not loaded into a paper tray  or if you wish to copy onto thick  paper  postcards  envelopes  overhead projector transparencies or label  sheets     To load paper  bypass tray        Open the bypass tray         When loading large sized paper   pull out the tray extension     pl    a       E        a  oO    extension                        With the side to be printed on facing down  insert the paper
179. ged with each account     Users registered with multiple accounts can switch the account that is  logged on to be able to use this machine  An example where machine  authentication settings have been specified with user authentication is  described below     Y Contact your administrator for passwords     Yy A maximum of 100 users can be registered with machine authentication   and a maximum of 1 000 account names can be registered     Boo      Machine authentication settings     amp   kentication en  can be specified using the User E  Authentication parameters in  Administrator mode  available  from the Utility mode  Settings  should be specified by the  administrator                             Henery 100       lf Administrator mode settings have been specified to display a list  of user names  the desired user name can be selected from a list   Touch  User List   touch the button for the desired user name to  select it  and then touch  OK   However  if  Enhance Security  has  been set to  ON    User List  does not appear        For details on specifying settings for machine authentication  refer  to  To register a user with machine authentication  on page 12 46        For details on logging on when external server authentication  settings have been specified  refer to  Controlling machine use with  user authentication  external server authentication   on page 3 36        Type in a user name specified with  machine authentication  and then  touch  Enter      N               
180. he  Extend Auto Reset  function  When specifying a time  for the  Extend Auto Reset  function  specify a time shorter than that for  entering Low Power mode or Sleep mode or for darkening the touch  panel     The Accessibility Settings screen appears again        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Additional copy operations 5       To set the    Notification Screen    function    It is possible to specify the length of time that the screen is displayed to  confirm the reception number or job ID after copying is finished     V The factory default setting is  3 sec       1 Display the Accessibility Settings screen   For details  refer to  page 5 15      2 Touch  Notification Screen      The Notification Screen screen appears        o Select the setting for the desired Set notification screen display time   length of time that the notification  screen is displayed          Touch  3 sec     10 sec   or  60  sec    B sec     10 sec    Eo sec     To display the notification screen fio Limit    until  Enter  is touched  touch  No i  Limit                   amp      Touch  Enter      The Accessibility Settings screen appears again        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  5 19    5 Additional copy operations       To set the    Sound Setting    function    It is possible to specify the volumes of the tone that is sounded when a touch  panel button is touched and of the alarm that is sounded when a malfunction  occurs     Vv The factory default setting is  Normal      1 Display the Accessibi
181. he  document  on page 4 9     2 Press the  Utility Counter  key  and Utility Counter  then touch  User Setting   i Tos  Setting    HSK anent   Counter  The User Setting screen appears  o    i        Total Copy  dnin nent     Reports 4 Counter    0    Printer Jota     als   Setting aj Sopy  Size     3 Touch  Store Overlay      The Store Overlay screen appears  Uti lity Counter  User Setting                      Users  f    Choice ak                   4 Touch  Set   and then touch the Phencepens  the appropriate  button   1  through  5   for the number      i Utility Counter  where the image is to be stored  a sn       meat Check mer                                                             MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  9 27    Application functions       If a button is pressed where no image is stored  the size of the  stored image appears on the button to indicate that an image has    been stored           No program registered       Program registered          To store the image with a number where an image is already stored     delete the image  touch  Set   an  number    To delete the image  touch  Dele  the number stored with the imag    Select the size of the area to be    scanned             To cancel changes to the  settings  touch  Cancel    Touch  Auto Detect  to  automatically detect the size of  the area to be scanned in the  document image     Touch  Custom Size  to display  the Custom Size screen  Touch   X  or  Y   use the keypad to  specify the size  and then
182. he pages arranged in the layout for a book or  magazine     For details  refer to  Creating booklet copies     Booklet    function   on    page 9 22   We    Printing distribution numbers and stamps             Each copy set can be printed with distribution numbers or preset stamps     For details  refer to  Printing additional information on copies  Image Settings  functions   on page 9 24     Printing copies overlapping a different image             Previously stored images can be printed overlapping copies     For details  refer to  Printing copies overlapping a different image     Image  Overlay    function   on page 9 27        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  1 15          Introduction       Copying with black and white reversed    A document can be copied with the black  and white colored areas of  images inversed     For details  refer to  Copying with light and dark coloring inversed     B W  Reverse    setting   on page 9 34     asc  m  td                Checking copy jobs  The status of queued jobs can be checked     For details  refer to  Job List screens  on page 5 22     Programming copy settings    Frequently used copy settings can be programmed and recalled to be used  with other copy jobs     For details  refer to  Registering copy programs  Mode Memory   on  page 5 9   Checking the copy settings    Screens showing the current copy settings can be displayed  From these  screens  the copy settings can also be changed     For details  refer to  Checking the copy se
183. hentication settings  have been specified  refer to  Controlling machine use with user  authentication  external server authentication   on page 3 36     Machine authentication settings can be specified using the User  Authentication parameters in Administrator Management  available from  the Utility mode  Settings should be specified by the administrator             Note   If Administrator Management settings have been specified to display a  list of user names  the desired user name can be selected from a list   Touch  User List   touch the button for the desired user name to select it   and then touch  OK      However  if  Enhance Security  has been set to  ON    User List  does  not appear        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  3 35    3 Before making copies       Controlling machine use with user authentication  external server  authentication     If external server authentication settings have been set by the network  administrator  this machine can only be used by users registered with  external server authentication     VY When external server authentication settings have been specified  only  users who enter user names and passwords registered with external  server user authentication can use this machine     Y Contact the network administrator for a user name and password     v User names and passwords for external server authentication are  registered and managed with the external server     Select the domain from  Domain Name       If  Active Directory  was selected
184. ic panel reset operation     As the factory default  the automatic panel reset operation is performed after  1 minute     Q    Detail   The length of time until the automatic panel reset operation is performed  and whether or not it is performed can be set from Utility mode  For  details  refer to  Auto Reset  on page 12 16     Whether or not the automatic panel reset operation is performed when  there is a change of user can be set from the Utility mode  For details   refer to  Auto Reset when Account is changed  on page 12 16     Automatically returning to the screen given priority    If no operation is performed for a specified length of time  the screen is  automatically changed to that for the mode given priority     As the factory default  the Copy mode screen is displayed after 1 minute     Q    Detail  The mode screen that is displayed can be changed from the Utility mode   For details  refer to  Default Screen  on page 12 27        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  3 29    3 Before making copies       Automatically conserving energy  Low Power mode     If no operation is performed for a specified length of time  the touch panel go  off  and the machine enters a mode where it conserves energy     This is the Low Power mode   The machine can receive jobs even while it is in Low Power mode   As the factory default  the machine enters Low Power mode after 15 minutes     To recover from Low Power mode    1 Press any key in the control panel or touch the touch panel         Th
185. ication settings Machine authentication settings  Machine Authentication Setting  Authentication setting     U jC   Uti lity Counter          User  Auth ti       f User  Authentication         General Settings 4 Active Directory        Domain Setting             Pree     100  emery 100     Q    Detail   Depending on the network environment  it may take some time to log on  with external server authentication  Selecting the following settings may  reduce the logon time                Specify a server compatible with Active Directory for DNS server    address 7     With DNS server address 1  register an SRV record for LDAP and  Kerberos for a server compatible with Active Directory     For more details  refer to the User manual  Network Scanner Operations         MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  12 43    Utility mode       To register a user with external server authentication    A user can be registered when external server authentication is used     1    N    Display the User Authentication screen for external server  authentication         For details on displaying the User Authentication screen  refer to   Specifying user authentication settings  on page 12 42     Authentication setting   The General Settings screen Uti I i ty Counter  appears                   Enter       General Settings    j Active Directory    f Domain Setting               venery 100     Select the authentication system   External Server  and then touch  Enter  Authentication setting     Uti Lity Counter 
186. ide  and then  carefully pull out any misfed paper in  the switchback unit                             6 10 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Troubleshooting 6          Carefully pull out any misfed paper in  the fusing section                                  Carefully pull out any misfed paper  around the image transfer roller                          Carefully remove any misfed paper                             QO Close the right side door     Detail  For details on the positions of paper misfeeds  refer to  Paper misfeed  indications  on page 6 6        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  6 11    Troubleshooting               Reminder   If the paper is misfed as described below  contact your technical  representative      The paper is wrapped around the roller in the fusing unit      The paper is folded or shredded by the roller in the fusing unit      The paper that was removed tore and partly remains in the fusing unit        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Troubleshooting 6       To clear a paper misfeed in the automatic duplex unit       Open the automatic duplex unit  door                       2 Carefully pull out any misfed paper     3 Close the automatic duplex unit door     Q    Detail  For details on the positions of paper misteeds  refer to  Paper misfeed  indications  on page 6 6        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  6 13    6 Troubleshooting       To clear a paper misfeed in the bypass tray       Remove all paper from the bypass  tray                 If misfed paper
187. ies subject to Class B regulations                   2 12  For users in countries not subject to Class B regulations              2 12       Contents 2 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        2 3 Laser  Salety ccc tz ctsets eect E teed reach Pas 2 13          Internal laser radiation                cccceeeeseeeeeeseeneeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaee 2 14  CDRE Regulation ieren aetna aea tated capes aiin 2 15  For European  Wsers  cs2s23 catia ete Rate ee 2 15  For Denmark USCIS iiaa aia reiia auaa 2 16  For Finland  Sweden users             ccccceeceecceccessseseeeceneeseseeteneeesseess 2 16  For Norway   sSerS eaa indeed eee el a aa aaeeea 2 17  Laser Safety label              cccssccceeceeeseeeeeeseceseseeeseseeeenseeeneseeeenseeeness 2 18  OZONE FElCASE Soi csi esos sesiesl E A tellin bea lide beeteli ceed 2 19  Acoustic noise  For European users Omnly               eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 2 20  For EU member states Only  0        cesceeeseeeeseeeeeeneeeeesneeeeseeeeeneeees 2 20  2 4 Caution notations and labels              cccccsssseeeesseseeeeeeesseneeeeeeeeeeeees 2 21  2 5       Space requirement ideda raaraa oes odie ev eden raana aatan aranana eni 2 22  2 6 Operation precautions           2  cccccseseeeeeesseseeeeeeesseseeeeeeesseneeeeeesseeeee 2 23  POWePrSOUICO ciel eh et de ee aie ed evened goede 2 23  Operating Environment         eeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeneeteseeeeeeneeeeeas 2 23  Storage Of COPICS apra r iega r yaa ai 2 23  3 1 Part names and their functions    
188. ight notice   this list of conditions and the following disclaimer    2  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright  notice  this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the  documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution    3  All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must  display the following acknowledgment     This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for  use in the OpenSSL Toolkit   http   www openssl org      4  Thenames  OpenSSL Toolkit  and  OpenSSL Project  must not be used  to endorse or promote products derived from this software without prior  written permission  For written permission  please contact openssl   core openssl org    5  Products derived from this software may not be called  OpenSSL  nor  may  OpenSSL  appear in their names without prior written permission  of the OpenSSL Project    6  Redistributions of any form whatsoever must retain the following  acknowledgment     This product includes software developed by the OpenSSL Project for  use in the OpenSSL Toolkit  http  Awww openssl org       THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY THE OpenSSL PROJECT  AS IS  AND  ANY EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT  LIMITED TO  THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND  FITNESS FOR A PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED  IN NO EVENT  SHALL THE OpenSSL PROJECT OR ITS CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR  ANY DIRECT  INDIRECT  INCIDENTAL  SPECIAL  EXEMPLARY  OR  C
189. in the desired number of copies     10 Press the  Start  key   Copying begins     XQ       Note  The size of the scanned area appears on buttons where an image is  Stored        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  9 31    9 Application functions       To check the overlay image    The stored image can be printed from the Image Overlay screen or Store  Overlay screen in order to be checked     The following procedure describes how to check the image from the Image  Overlay screen of the Application screen     VY The  Image Overlay  function is available only if optional hard disk is  installed        1 Touch  Application   and then touch  Rages   Image Settings             To check the image from the  Store Overlay screen  display the     cover Mode  Hee eae  Store Overlay screen  and then ia    perform the same procedure Essin l EAEg eee Eory   starting from step 3  For details SeA paT 7  on displaying the Store Overlay  kitines J  Reverse _         screen  refer to  To store an Job List   overlay image  Store Overlay   on page 9 27     The Image Settings screen appears                                                              N    Touch  Image Overlay   Ready to copy       To cancel the Image Settings  Basics   Seiseane    88R8R   Application  functions  touch  OFF    emage Settings Ere d     The Image Overlay screen appears   Nonbering i d  SPa iay      Job List                                  ey  WW    Touch  Check   and then touch the Snapes ap  pa Suton senor     button fo
190. ing printed documents contain   ing both text and images  such as pamphlets or catalogs        Text  amp  Photo       Select this setting when copying printed documents  such as  iiih pamphlets or catalogs   Select this setting to produce better reproductions of half   fi tone document images  photographs  etc   that cannot be re   produced with the usual copy settings        Select this setting when copying documents containing only  text  where some of the text appears faint  such as that writ   ten with a pencil     The copied text is reproduced so that it is darker  making it  easier to read        Dot Matrix                   Density Adjustment       Icon Description       The density can be adjusted to one of nine levels    Each time  Dark  is touched  the density is darkened by one  level  Each time  Light  is touched  the density is lightened by  one level                 Select this setting to automatically adjust the density accord   ing to the document that is loaded                          MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  4 43    Basic copy operation       Specifying a document quality setting    V The factory default setting is  Text  amp  Photo    VY Fordetails on positioning the document  refer to  Feeding the document     on page 4 9   1 Position the document to be copied     2 In the Basics screen  touch   Quality Density      The Quality Density screen appears     3 Touch the button for the quality  setting most appropriate for the  loaded document         For
191. is spec   ified or when the paper trays are switched  automatically           8 6    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        Copy paper original documents 8    Q    Detail  The available special paper settings differ for each paper tray        The settings for overhead projector transparencies  thick paper  thin  paper and envelopes can be specified only for the bypass tray  For  details on specifying the settings for overhead projector transparencies   thick paper  thin paper and envelopes for the bypass tray  refer to  To  specify a setting for special paper  Change Setting   on page 8 15     For details on specifying the settings for paper only for single sided  copying  for recycled paper and for special paper  refer to  Special Paper  Setting    on page 12 75        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  8 7    Copy paper original documents       Precautions for paper    The following types of paper should not be used  otherwise decreased print  quality  paper misfeeds or damage to the machine may occur     Overhead projector transparencies that have already been fed through  the machine  even if the transparency is still blank    Paper that has been printed on by a heat transfer printer or an inkjet  printer   Paper that is either extremely thick or extremely thin   Folded  curled  wrinkled  or torn paper   Paper that has been left unwrapped for a long period of time   Damp paper  perforated paper  or paper with punched holes  Extremely smooth or extremely rough paper  or paper with
192. ition of the binding margin for the even   numbered pages can be adjusted     ae    Note  As the factory default   OFF  is selected for the Margin setting     Document Binding Margin Position       Icon Description       Select this setting if the document that is loaded has a binding margin on the  left   e Single sided copies of double sided documents          Select this setting if the document that is loaded has a binding margin at the  top   e Single sided copies of double sided documents                         4 22 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation 4          Icon Description       e Double sided copies of single sided documents    PLLLLSL L774       nee                     To select a Margin setting   Y Fordetails on positioning the document  refer to  Feeding the document   on page 4 9    1 Position the document to be copied         When loading a document with a binding margin  position the top  of the document toward the back of the machine     2 In the Basics screen  touch Re o co  Combine Originals   eE e Sess deer eres oeseearee    g      Basics Srisinais  oenstey   Application  The Combine Originals screen Paper Foon Bing lex  appears  pause 000    i io  Finishing j   Original         Job List        3 Touch  Margin   Ready to copy     The Margin screen appears    Basics  ombine       Originais             2in1 Jia    Job List Memory 100           MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  4 23    Basic copy operation       Select the binding margin posi
193. k the staple cartridge holder                       4 Remove the empty staple cartridge  from the staple cartridge holder                    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  10 9    1 0 Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers       5 Insert the new staple cartridge into    the staple cartridge holder                 6 Carefully remove the stopper            Insert the staple cartridge holder   and then push it down until it locks  into place                 Close the front door        10 10 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers 1 0       To replace the staple cartridge in saddle stitcher       Raise the copy output tray  and then  push down the staple cartridge  holder and remove it                                            Press in the area marked  PUSH  to  unlock the staple cartridge holder                 Remove the empty staple cartridge  from the staple cartridge holder                    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  10 11    1 0 Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers          Load the new staple cartridge into  the staple cartridge holder              Carefully remove the stopper              Insert the staple cartridge holder   and then push it up until it locks into  place         When inserting the staple  cartridge holder  be sure to insert  it so that it faces the correct  direction                             Return the copy output tr
194. l  of the data     Do not touch the machine while deleting all of the data in order to prevent  errors from occurring     XQ       Note  The data on the memory cannot be erased while a job is being performed     To erase all data from the internal memory    Display the Admin  2 screen  and then touch  Memory Management          For details on displaying the Admin  2 screen  refer to  Displaying  the Administrator Management screen  on page 12 25        If the optional hard disk drive is installed   HDD Management   appears instead of  Memory Management   For details on the  HDD  Management  parameter  refer to the User manual  Box  Operations     The Memory Management screen appears        12 76    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode 12    2 Touch  Overwrite All Data   lp ae a    The Overwrite All Data screen Uti lity Counter  appears                 Henery 100     3 Touch  Yes   and then touch  Enter   Are you sure you want    to overwrite all data     Wait until the message  All data has   Utility counte  been overwritten   appears                 Henery 100    amp         Note    f a job is being performed  the message  Cannot start because there is  an unfinished job   appears  Touch  Enter  to return to the previous  screen  make sure that the job is completed  and then select the   Overwrite All Data  parameter again     If the message  Failed to overwrite All Data       appears  turn the  machine off with the main power switch  wait about 10 seconds before  t
195. lay area The status of the machine and details on opera   tions that must be performed are displayed  here    2 Functions settings display Tabs and buttons for displaying screens con   taining various functions are displayed    Touch a tab or button to display the corre   sponding screen for specifying the settings    3 Status display area The amount of memory space available in addi   tion to icons indicating the status of jobs and the  machine are displayed    4  Mixed Original  button Touch to scan a document containing pages of  different sizes   See page 4 17    5  Finishing  button Touch to specify settings for sorting  grouping   stapling  or hole punching   See page 4 50    6  Job List  button Jobs currently being performed or waiting to be  performed can be checked   See page 5 22    7  Save in User Box  button  Appears   Touch to save the data of scanned documents    only when the hard disk drive is in   stalled        in boxes  The destination boxes can be created   file names can be specified  and saved docu   ments can be printed    For details  refer to the User manual  Box Oper   ations               MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies       Icons that appear in the screen       Icon    Description       Indicates that copies are being made       oH i    Indicates that pages are being printed          Indicates that printing was stopped       A E    Indicates that data is waiting to be printed       exe    Indicates that computer data is being
196. lever toward you  and then  pull up on the control panel                    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  3 23    Before making copies       Turning on the main power and the auxiliary power    This machine has two power controls  the main power switch and the   Power   auxiliary power  key     To turn on the machine    The main power switch turns on off all functions of the machine  Normally   the main power switch is turned on     The  Power   auxiliary power  key turns on off machine operations  for  example  for copying  printing or scanning  When the  Power   auxiliary  power  key is turned off  the machine enters a state where it conserves  energy           Set the main power switch to                        2 Press the  Power   auxiliary power                      3 24    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies 3    Q    Detail   When the  Power   auxiliary power  key is turned on  the indicator on the   Start  key lights up in orange  and a screen indicating that the machine   s starting up appears    After a few seconds  the message  Now warming up  Ready to scan    appears on the touch panel  and the indicator on the  Start  key lights up  in green  indicating that a job can now be queued        The default settings are the settings that are selected immediately after  the machine is turned on and before any setting is specified from the  control panel or touch panel  and those that are selected when the   Reset  key is pressed to cancel all settings s
197. lity Settings screen   For details  refer to  page 5 15      2 Touch  Sound Setting      The Sound Setting screen appears     a a    Sound Setting  rs                iow           4 Touch  Enter      The Accessibility Settings screen appears again      amp     Note   The volume of the tone produced when a control panel key is pressed or  when an alarm is sounded can also be changed from the Utility mode  For  details  refer to  Tone volume parameters  on page 12 24        5 20 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Additional copy operations 5       To set the    Key Sound Tones    function    It is possible to specify the tone of the sound produced when a touch panel  button is touched and of the alarm that is sounded when a malfunction  occurs     V The factory default setting is  High      Display the Accessibility Settings screen   For details  refer to  page 5 15      2 Touch  Key Sound Tones      The Key Sound Tones screen appears     3 Touch  Low    Normal  or  High      Key Sound Tones  a                a          J          Touch  Enter      The Accessibility Settings screen appears again        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  5 21    Additional copy operations                                                                                                                                                                      5 6 Job List screens  Jobs  Specifying the desired copy settings  then pressing the  Start  key queues  the copy operation in this machine  This queued op
198. lowing Image Settings functions are available        Setting    Description       Set Numbering    A three digit distribution number can be printed on each copy        Stamp       The selected preset text  CONFIDENTIAL  TOP SECRET   COPY  DRAFT  DO NOT COPY  FINAL  or PROOF  can be print   ed              1 1  ij 7    1 1          To print the distribution number     Set Numbering    function     VY The distribution number is normally printed as a three digit number  If   Starting Number  is set to  1    001  is printed     Position the document to be copied         For details on positioning the document  refer to  Feeding the  document  on page 4 9        Touch  Application   and then touch EAA     Image Settings        Basics   Grighr       The Image Settings screen appears         Cover Hode     EPE                               FEISE IRT   B38 Cony     Erase d A    OW eal ri   j inage B W Separate  Settings _      Reverse   Scan     Job List   Memory 100                          9 24    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Application functions 9          Touch  Set Numbering   Ready to copy         Tocancel the Image Settings  functions  touch  OFF          f the optional hard disk drive is  installed  the  Image Overlay   function can be used  For details  O  kd       refer to  Printing copies  Rosbering J  Stamp      Job List Memory 100        overlapping a different image      Image Overlay    function   on  page 9 27    The Set Numbering screen appears           4 Using
199. lue within the allowable range     x0  250474  000       Hinimal  x0  930                  Ifthe value was incorrectly  entered  press the  C   clear  key  in the keypad to erase the value   and then specify the correct value     x1 000         Job List emery 100    4 Touch  Enter    The Zoom screen appears again     Detail  The enter zoom ratio can be stored  For details on storing zoom ratios   refer to  Storing the desired zoom ratio  on page 4 38        4 34 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation       Specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios  Individual    Zoom settings     By using the keypad  separate zoom ratios can be typed in directly for the  horizontal direction  between x0 250 and x4 000  and for the vertical  direction  between x0 250 and x4 000      By changing the horizontal and vertical zoom ratios  the copy image can be    resized as shown in the following illustration        ABCDE          ABCDE             bh                      1 In the Basics screen  touch  Zoom      The Zoom screen appears     2 Touch  XY Zoon      The XY Zoom screen appears        pGombine   Quality7 Application      Basics Originais f Densi    Paper Zoom Duplex    Pei pea    Et Mixed     Finishing 4   Original     Job List amory 100         Basics Grisinais  bensiey   Application       Paper   1 000   Eas  x0  250 4  000   Auto Zoon     XY Zoom d   Re  f   duce                                                                                        Job Lis
200. mm  First copy MP0125   5 3 seconds or less  with Letter  9 paper fed from the 1st tray   MP1035   4 8 seconds or less  with Letter J paper fed from the 1st tray   Copy speed MP1025   25 ppm  with A4 U   MP1035     35 ppm  with A4 U        Magnification ratios    Full size   1 0    x1 000   Enlarge  x1 154  x1 414  x2 000   Reduce  x0 816  x0 707  x0 500    Minimal  x0 930     Zoom  x0 250 to x4 000  in 0 001 increments   Stored zoom ratios  3     Minimal  zoom ratio  between x0 900 and x0 999        Multiple copies    1 to 999 sheets       Density control    Manual density adjustment  9 levels   Automatic density adjustment  5 levels        Power requirements    AC 220 240 V  6 1 A  10  or less  50 Hz       Power consumption    1 300 1 470 W  10  or less       Energy efficiency       MP1025  27 wh h  MP1035  31 wh h       Dimensions    677 mm  W  x 710 mm  D  x 718 mm  H        Space requirements 2    1 001 mm  W  x 710 mm  D        Memory    Standard memory  192 MB  For files  32 MB          Weight          Approx  74 kg         Energy efficiency when the Low Power mode is set to 1 minute and the  Sleep mode is set to 1 minute     2 The indicated spaced requirements represent the space required to fully  extend the bypass tray     In order to incorporate improvements  these product specifications are  subject to change without notice        7 4 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Specifications          Automatic Duplex Unit       Specifications       Paper types    Plain pape
201. modification            A WARNING    Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death    gt  Do not ignore this safety advices           Warning Symbol       e Do not attempt to remove the covers and panels which have  been fixed to the product  Some products have a high volt   age part or a laser beam source inside that could cause an  electrical shock or blindness        e Do not modify this product  as a fire  electrical shock  or  breakdown could result  If the product employs a laser  the  laser beam source could cause blindness                              2 4    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Installation and operation precautions 2       Power cord         A WARNING    Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death    gt  Do not ignore this safety advices           Warning       e Use only the power cord supplied in the package  If a power  cord is not supplied  only use the power cord and plug that  is specified in POWER CORD INSTRUCTION  Failure to use  this cord could result in a fire or electrical shock        e Use the power cord supplied in the package only for this ma   chine and NEVER use it for any other product  Failure to ob   serve this precaution could result in a fire or electrical shock        e Do not scratch  abrade  place a heavy object on  heat  twist   bend  pull on  or damage the power cord  Use of a damaged  power cord  exposed core wire  broken wire  etc   could re   sult in a fire or breakdown    Should any of 
202. mon standard document  sizes to standard paper sizes are preset     Y Touch to enlarge the zoom ratio  and touch  zoom ratio in x0 001 increments        to reduce the          1 In the Basics screen  touch  Zoom    The Zoom screen appears   Basics   origeasts   SYALY   Application  Paper Zoom Duplex  puto 000   Finishing    82 SSna1_   Job List  2 Touch the button for the appropriate E o co    zoom ratio according to the  document and paper sizes       Basics Sempane   Beauty   application             Paper Duplex                                            prgprg hie aa 7                MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  4 33    Basic copy operation       Typing in the zoom ratio    By using the keypad  a zoom ratio between x0 250 and x4 000 can be typed  in directly without changing the height to width ratio                                                                                                                                   1 In the Basics screen  touch  Zoom   o co  The Zoom screen appears   Basics  82ga  Bualstey  application  Paper Zoom Duplex  puso 000  Finishing   82 S nai_   Job List 00  2 Touch  XY Zoom   o co  The XY Zoom screen appears    Basics  S2026   39uPHt    application  Paper E  iee  x0  250 4  000  near 1S PILES  3 Using the keypad  type in the desired 5  zoom ratio    ee    Basics  amp  Application      If a value outside the allowable Paper        Banas  range is specified  the message XY Zoom  Li    Input Error  appears  Type a EAEE  Sion  E     va
203. must be printed  with paper of the same width      f a staple setting is to be selected  select the orientation in which the  document is positioned  If an Original Direction setting is not selected   the copies may not be stapled as desired    For details on specifying the document orientation  refer to  Selecting the  document orientation  Original Direction settings   on page 4 20     When finisher is installed                Paper Weight Paper Size Loading Capacity  detected in ei   ther measurement   56 g m  to 90 g m  A4 Gi q  B5    0  A5 W 1 000 sheets 150 mm  A3 a  B4 m 500 sheets 75 mm                      4 56    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation 4       To bind copies with staples    1 In the Basics screen  touch Re o co   Finishing      Application    o   Combine f Quality         Basics  Originais f Density    The Finishing screen appears     Paper Zoom Sup las  puso 000    r    Mixed     Finishing 4d   Original      Job List       2 Touch either  Corner Staple  or  2 ESSI ToN SEVHTRA fo eelack tne  Staples        If  Corner Staple  is selected  the  copies are bound together with a    staple in the upper left corner      If  2 Staples  is selected   ceres  iit tt   Position Setting  appears inthe   Ss  Hele Punch    Crease ad  screen  To select the binding Caas  position  continue with step 3  a     If a staple setting is selected  the  Sort  setting is automatically  selected      To cancel the staple setting  touch  Corner Staple  or  2 Sta
204. n jobs  To check a job being performed    1 Touch  Job List    p    The Job List screen appears  fBasice  mme  SEALY   Annlication    Paper Zoon Bupa    er ee  Finishing j  original         Job List emery 100                                                                                                                                                                            2 Check the job being performed  Job List 2 24 17 17      Touch  f  and  different screen        A maximum of 8 jobs being  performed can be displayed                 Brint   print   Type  Doc                     j todisplaya       User Name Revd  11725   19138           copi 11725        Beintin  W o ye4    11725   19 38                    vob List PFa e    Me p  Free    70      Q    Detail   A job being performed or a job waiting to be performed  such as a queued  job  can be deleted  For details  refer to  To delete a job  on page 5 25    n addition  the job can be deleted after the  Stop  key is pressed  For  details  refer to  Stopping deleting a job  on page 4 63        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  5 23    5 Additional copy operations       To check the printing order    1 Touch  Job List   Ready 1060    The Job List screen appears    Basics  52min   SYA   Application    y    Paper Zoom Bupiax  Ruso 000    a  Finishing j  original      Job List emery 100          2 Touch  Print Order   sob List 2 24 17 17 exit                                                                                        
205. n the package  was unwrapped  faces up       Do not load so many sheets of  paper that the top of the stack is  higher than the W mark  A  maximum of 500 sheets can be  loaded              Film     I ag                             How is curled paper loaded    gt  Flatten the paper before loading it        3 54 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies 3          Re adjust the lateral guides to fit the  size of the paper                 5 Close the paper tray     XQ       Reminder  Be careful not to touch the Film with your hand s     Ifthe lateral guides are not positioned correctly for the loaded paper  the  paper size will not be correctly detected  Be sure to adjust the lateral  guides to the size of the loaded paper     Q    Detail  For details on the paper that can be loaded into the 1st and 2nd trays     refer to  Copy paper original documents  on page 8 3        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  3 55    3 Before making copies       3 5 Loading paper into the LCT    To load paper  LCT     Vv lf the  Power   auxiliary power  key is turned off  even though the main  power switch is on  the LCT cannot be pulled out  even after the tray  release button is pressed  Be sure that the machine is turned on with the   Power   auxiliary power  key     Press the tray release button                             Pull out the LCT                    Load the paper into the right side of  the LCT so that the side of the paper  to be printed on  the side facing up  when the packa
206. nal  or choose Custom      scanned             Basics  Sembane    quality                   Oversized Paper     A380   AGD  B60    A40   B40   FIS     RES  EES                          Job List Memory 100        Touch  Custom Size  to display  the Custom Size screen  Touch   X  or  Y   use the keypad to   specify the size  and then touch e o e 0   Enter     a    Custom Size screen         Basics Griginais  oensity   Application    iy  25 432         en 25n297    Job List Memory 100                                A value outside the allowable   range cannot be entered    To change the entered value  press the  C   clear  key  and then  enter the correct value    If the  Image Repeat  function is registered with a program  both  standard sizes and non standard sizes can be registered  For  details on registering programs  refer to  Registering copy  programs  Mode Memory   on page 5 9     Touch  Enter         MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Application functions 9       8 Touch  Enter   and then touch  Enter  in the next two screens that  appear        9 In the Basics screen  touch  Paper         and then select the paper tray loaded EESSNMT  rr renee      Basics Sompine    quay Application  with the paper       i 4                                  Auto    to  CA A4D      7   change  Setting                        Job List emery 100    10 Specify any other desired copy settings     a  es    Using the keypad  type in the desired number of copies     ik  N    Press the  Start  k
207. nal cover or ADF        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation 4       Scanning a document in separate batches     Separate Scan    setting     A large document can be divided and continuously scanned in a number of  batches     A maximum of 80 document pages can be loaded into the ADF at one time   However  by copying with the  Separate Scan  setting  a document that  exceeds 80 pages can be scanned and treated as a single copy job  In  addition  the scanning location can be switched between the original glass  and the ADF during the scanning operation     O N    1 In the Application screen  touch Ready to copy    Separate Scan                         To cancel the  Separate Scan   setting  touch  Separate Scan   again to deselect it                                      fEdge Frame     Book Copy7       ie  Margin Erase Repeat    d  r     Lmage i BZW Separate   Settings jj   Scan       Job List Memory 100                 2 Load the first batch of the document   and then press the  Start  key   Scanning begins         No  of  The message  To continue scanning  nsss     ET  replace original and press Start   Finish l  appears         Load the next batch of the  document  and then press the   Start  key        If the document cannot be loaded into the ADF  place it on the  original glass  For details on the types of documents that can be  loaded into the ADF  refer to  Original documents  on page 8 17        Repeat step 2 until all pages of the document have been 
208. ne 4    Basics   Oraganals    Poriginal   Direction 4     Meri n 5    a ME                   2in1  iina    PJob List Memory 100        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     4 7    Basic copy operation       Operations where the setting specified first is given priority    If a warning message appears  indicating that settings cannot be combined   those settings cannot be specified together     The procedure for selecting the  Corner Staple  setting after setting the   Booklet  function is described below      d Set the  Booklet  function  Ready to copy                   emaase     Book Copy J Booklet          Henery 100        4 5  a Select the  Corner Staple  setting  This mode is not available  with Booklet   The message  This mode is not f       semeing  Pauaulyy  available with Booklet   appears and   F  u n 5  the  Corner Staple  setting cannot Er TREE  be selected  L       The  Booklet  function remains  Non sort__   2 Staples J  selected and the  Corner Staple  Kaas   Hete Punch   Srense    setting is canceled   eon   To select the  Corner Staple  setting  iea too  cancel the  Booklet  function  and then select the  Corner Staple   setting                       MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation       4 3    Feeding the document    The document can be loaded into the optional ADF or positioned on the  original glass        Document feed method Features       used to automatically scan double sided documents     Using the ADF By using the ADF  a multi page
209. neeeeeees 12 33   12 8 Specifying account data SettingS         cccsssessseesseeennsseeenenenenees 12 34  To display the desired ACCOUNT    eeeeeesseeeeeeeeeeteeeeeneeeeeneeees 12 34  To register AN account           eecceeeeseeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeaees 12 36  TO MANAGE AN account          cccceeeeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeeeseeeeeeteeaee 12 38  To delete an account           eeeceeeeeessceeeseeneneeeeenenereseeteseneteneeeees 12 40  Allowing printing without authentication                cceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee 12 41   12 9 Specifying user authentication SettingS           sccsseeseenseeeees 12 42  To display the User Authentication screen    sssr 12 42  To register a user with external server authentication                 12 44  To register a user with machine authentication                  cee 12 46  To manage a user for machine authentication    12 49  To delete a user for machine authentication          cceecceeceees 12 51   12 10 Specifying software switch settings  machine functions          12 52  To specify a software Switch Setting          eseeeeseeeeseeeesereeeeneeees 12 54  Specifying permissions for copy functions  mode 307               12 56  Specifying the enlarged display method  mode 311              0  12 57  Specifying that the    Auto Paper Select    setting  and the   Auto Zoom    setting can be selected at the  same time  mode 408           cccceceeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeseaeeeeeeeneeneees 12 58  Specifying the measurement units  mo
210. ng  Mode   p  12 25   Numbers of  RX Call Rings  Password Communica   tion Pass  Print Lists    Setting List  Report Set  TX Report  tings 3  Activity Re   port  Document TX Document  Management  RX  Document  Admin  2 Network Set    Network Set    Basic Set  DHCP  tings 4 ting 1 tings  IP Address  Setting  Subnet Mask  Gateway  Self Domain  Name  Network  Board Set  DNS Settings  Machine  Name  SMTP Set  SMTP Server  tings Address  E Mail Ad   dress  POP3 POP3 Server  Settings Address  POP3 User  Name  POP3  Password  Auto RX  Check          12 8    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        Utility mode    12          Utility Counter       Admin  Man     Admin  2       agement        p  12 25     Network Set   tings 7                                              Network Set   ting 1    Priority Com   press Level    E Mail Mode       Scan Mode       Scanner Set   tings    Activity Re   port       RX  Doc Header  Print       E Mail Head   er Text       Gateway TX       Subject Reg   istration       Divide  Settings        gt  Page Divi   sion        gt  Binary Di   vision        gt  Binary Di   vision Size       LDAP Setting    LDAP Search       LDAP Server  Setting       Frame Type  Set       IP Filtering    Accept  Setting       Deny access                         Network Set   ting 2       IP Relay Set   tings 1    IP Relay Sta   tion Registra   tion       IP Relay Sta   tion Setting          Relay Result  Port          MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     12 9       Utility mode    
211. ng j   origina       Job List           CO    Combine   aa aB        Basics fGraginals   Densi Application          Paper Duplex                                                                     Basics  originals   Bensa    Application  Paper Zoon eie  XY Zoom Enter             individ     ual Zoom         Fere   Set Zoom      x0  25044  000       Hinimal  x0  930               Job List emery100       4 38    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation 4                                                                                                                      A Using the keypad  type in the desired e 200 o 0  zoom ratio  between x0 250 and a  4 000    Basics Griginais  oensiey   Application    i Paper Foon  Eee    EPA DEER      If a value outside the allowable Set Zoon  range is specified  the message reese     Input Error  appears  Type a x0  250 4 000 iiai      inima  value within the allowable range  EMEEK EEN      If the value was incorrectly L x0 900 0 999  Job List mme 00  entered  press the  C   clear  key    if  in the keypad to erase the value  and then specify the correct value    To store a  Minimal  zoom ratio  type in the desired zoom ratio  between x0 900 and x0 999      Touch the button or  Minimal  where e 200 o 0  the new zoom ratio is to be stored  FE enee    Basics Pomas   Benssey   Application     Paper  Zoon   Ga  Set Zoon   x2  000    x0  25044  000 rt    Ninnisi  x0 900 0 999  Job List enor 400  O Touch  Enter      The XY Zoom scre
212. nger authenticated     By canceling the penalty  certain operations are set so that the access lock  does not apply to them and they can be unlocked     The access lock applies to the following passwords  However  the  administrator password cannot be set so that the access lock does not apply  to it    passwords for confidential documents  box passwords  user authentication  passwords  print management passwords  bulletin board F code  passwords  confidential box F code passwords  and the administrator  password    Q    Detail  As a default  the access lock is disabled     The software switch settings can be used to enable the access lock  For  details on the software switch settings  refer to  Specifying software  switch settings  machine functions   on page 12 52     Even if the access lock was disabled with the software switch settings  it  is enabled when  Enhance Security  is set to  ON      To cancel an access lock    Display the Admin  2 screen  and then touch  Security Setting          For details on displaying the Admin  2 screen  refer to  Displaying  the Administrator Management screen  on page 12 25     The Security Setting screen appears        Touch  Unlock      The Unlock screen appears                 weer    100        12 74 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode 12       Select the button for the operation to  be set so that the access lock is no          longer applied  and then touch    Enter              If no options corresponding to  the buttons
213. ninistrator Management 2                Printer  Setting        Software SW     J  Delete Job             Security   Setting           Memory  Management j  Memory   Free     100              Q    Detail    For details on the administrator access code  refer to  Administrator    Code Input  on page 12 30        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        Utility mode    12       12 5 Specifying Initial Settings    From the Initial Settings screen  the date and time and time zone can be  specified     The following procedure describes how to display the Initial Settings screen  and specify its settings     To specify initial settings    N    Q    Display the Administrator Management 1 screen  and then touch  Initial   Settings         For details on displaying the Administrator Management 1 screen   refer to  Displaying the Administrator Management screen  on  page 12 25    The Initial Settings screen appears        Select a parameter to be set     Enter               Tangusge for     Communication          TSI Registration            Henery 100     Specify the desired settings  and then touch  Enter       To cancel changes to the settings  touch  Cancel        To exit the Initial Settings screen  touch  Enter  in each screen until  the Basics screen appears     Detail  For details on specifying parameters other than the  Date  amp  Time Setting   parameter  refer to the User manual  Facsimile Operations         MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  12 27    Utility mode       Date  amp  Time
214. ns 5       5 Additional copy operations  5 1 Checking the copy settings  Mode Check   From the Check Job Details screens  the current copy settings can be  checked and changed if desired   To check the settings  1 Press the  Mode Check  key   Mode Check  e   a  MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  5 3       Additional copy operations       The Check Job Details screen Spek go gt  174  appears                 Check Job  Details    Check Job  Details    peen 474  TOP SECRET    First page          5 4    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Additional copy operations 5       2 After checking the settings  touch  Exit  or press the  Mode Check  key  again     The Basics screen appears again     Q    Detail  There are four Check Job Details screens  The number of the currently  displayed screen appears to the right of the screen title     To display the previous screen  touch  Back   To display the next screen   touch  Fwd       f the setting for a function has been changed trom the default  the button  for that function appears selected     To change the settings  Press the  Mode Check  key        Touch  Back  or  Fwd  until the button for the function to be changed is  displayed     J Touch the button for the function whose setting is to be changed     The screen for specifying the setting appears      amp  Follow the appropriate procedure to change the setting        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  5 5    Additional copy operations                         5 2 Printing a sample to check the 
215. nt  size cannot be detected automatically  If a document of non standard  paper size is loaded  select the size of the paper to be copied    If highly translucent or transparent documents  such as overhead  transparencies or diazo photosensitive paper  are loaded  the document  size cannot be detected automatically  Place a blank sheet of paper of  the same size over the document    Do not place objects exceeding 2 kg on the original glass  otherwise the  original glass may be damaged    If a book is placed on the original glass  do not press it down extremely  hard  otherwise the original glass may be damaged        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  8 19       8 Copy paper original documents          8 20 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        9 Application functions       Application functions 9           a  9   Application functions    9 1 Adding cover pages     Cover Mode    function     Specify the paper to be used for the cover pages and add front and back  cover pages to the copies     In addition  the first and last pages of the document can be copied onto the  cover pages                    Cover page Setting Description  Front Cover With Image The first page of the document is copied onto  the front cover page   Blank The front cover page is added at the begin   ning of the copy   Back Cover None A back cover page is not added   With Image The last page of the document is copied onto    the back cover page                    Blank The back cover page is added at the end of
216. nterrupting job has finished printing  press the  Interrupt  key   The indicator on the  Interrupt  key goes off   The copy settings return to those specified before printing was  interrupted   Note   f the interrupting job is cancelled  printing for the interrupted job  automatically restarts   5 8 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Additional copy operations 5       5 4 Registering copy programs  Mode Memory   Up to 10 copy programs can be registered     The registered copy programs can be recalled and used for copying     To register a copy program    Using the touch panel and control panel keys  specify the copy settings  to be registered in the copy program      9 Can the current settings be checked    gt  To check the currently specified copy settings  press the  Mode  Check  key        2 Press the  Mode Memory  key   The Program screen appears  Mode Memory   E          le   J Touch  Set   Select RECALL  INPUT  DELETE or CHECK   then press the appropriate job   key     Progran                         Job List Memory 100        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  5 9    Additional copy operations       Touch the button for the program number where a program is to be  registered       Ifa program has not yet been registered with the program number  button that is pressed  the empty icon disappears from the number  button to indicate that a program is registered with it           No program registered Program registered          Q           Ifa program has already been  registered
217. ntication data is initialized        To exit the  Account Authentication screen   touch  Enter  in each screen until  o    the Basics screen appears     Restart the machine  and then the login screen appears after the  machine has finished warming up        12 32 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode       User Authentication ON OFF       Parameter    Description    Default setting       User Auth  Setting    Specify whether or not user authentica   tion settings are to be applied  Select  one of the following as the user authen   tication method   e ON  External Server   Select this setting to apply the user  authentication function of an external  server   e ON  MFP   Select this setting to apply the ma   chine   s user authentication function   e OFF  Select this setting to apply no user au   thentication function     OFF       Account Track    Select whether or not account track set   tings are to be applied     OFF       Synchronize          Select whether or not use of the machine  is controlled with user authentication  and account track synchronized        OFF       Allow Print without Authentication       Parameter    Description    Default setting       Allow Print without Au   thentication          Select whether or not to permit printing  of data with no user and account speci   fied during computer printing while the  user is logged on with user authentica   tion or account track settings have been  specified on the machine        OFF        amp     eee  
218. o  To register a user with    i   ee  external server authentication  a Pe  on page 12 44  Domain Name    Salinger             Henery 100         If  Active Directory  was selected in the User Authentication screen  for external server authentication and default domain name display  in Administrator mode was set to  ON    Domain Name  appears  with the domain name set as the default  Touch  Domain Name  to  display the list of domains registered with Active Directory  and  then select the desired domain  For details on specifying settings  for external server authentication  refer to  To register a user with  external server authentication  on page 12 44         f default domain name display in Administrator mode is set to   OFF    Domain Selection  appears  Touch  Domain Selection  to  display the list of domains registered with Active Directory  and  then select the desired domain  However  if multiple domains are  not registered   Domain Selection  will not appear        3 42 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies       2    3    4    Ol    Type in a user name specified with  external server authentication  and  then touch  Enter      Touch  Password      Type in the password  and then  touch  Enter      Touch  Login      If the user name or password was  incorrectly entered  the input  screen appears again  Type in the  correct user name and password   and then touch  Login     Instead of touching  Login   press  the  Access  key to complete the  operation 
219. o the interleaves        With the  With Image  With the  Blank   setting setting                         To copy using the    OHP Interleave    function    Y No Finishing setting can be used   VY The number of copies is set to  1  and cannot be changed     Position the document to be copied          For details on positioning the document  refer to  Feeding the  document  on page 4 9     Load the overhead projector transparencies into the bypass tray  and  load the interleaf paper into the desired paper tray       For details on loading overhead projector transparencies  refer to   Paper types and paper capacities  on page 8 5   Loading paper  into the bypass tray  on page 3 58  and  To specify a setting for  special paper  Change Setting   on page 8 15         Use interleaf paper with the same size as the overhead projector  transparencies  and load them in the same orientation as the  transparencies        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  9 9    Application functions       Wd       Touch  Application   and then touch EAA   OHP Interleave      The OHP Interleave screen appears                       Fone  4  Unter leave              tol H   EE    Fe   ra    B W    Separate    Reverse   Scan   F                         4  A    Touch either  With Image  or  Blank        If  With Image  is selected  the    Semene  8  interleaves are inserted  l r  alternating with overhead                      projector transparencies  and the pobepleavins OHP Films  same document page is printed i
220. ocument may  occur        4 18 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation 4       4 In the Basics screen  touch  Mixed Re o co  Original      parny peny      Basics  Originais f Densi        Application    To cancel the  Mixed Original  Paper coon Sine lex  setting  touch  Mixed Original  pute 000    again to deselect it     re ee  Finishing j  original      Job List emery 100       5 Press the  Start  key   Scanning begins     Detail   Do not load more than 80 sheets or so many sheets that the top of the  stack is higher than the Y mark  otherwise a document misfeed or  damage to the document or machine may occur  However  a document  that exceeds 80 pages can be scanned in separate batches  For details   refer to  Scanning a document in separate batches     Separate Scan     setting   on page 4 13      amp     Note   f the  Mixed Original  setting was selected  double sided copying  cannot be selected        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  4 19    4 Basic copy operation       Selecting the document orientation  Original Direction settings     When copying double sided documents  making double sided copies  or  using a combined copy setting  specify the document orientation  otherwise  the copies may not be printed in the correct page order or correct front and  back page arrangement      amp         Note  The factory default setting is the first setting  with the top of the document  at the top  toward the back of the machine       Document Loading Orientation     
221. ode    function             22 ccteceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 5 16  To set the    Key Speed Settings    function  sses 5 17  To set the    Extend Auto Reset    function               ceeeeeeeeeeteeeeeeees 5 18  To set the    Notification Screen    function               ceeeeeeeeeeeeeeee teeta 5 19  To set the    Sound Setting    function   0 00    ee eeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeeeeaeees 5 20  To set the    Key Sound Tones    function    sses 5 21  Job Listser  ens  seirinin esnaera noae aeaa arae cce ates ece scenes chdtsteadeceenect 5 22  JODS annia a a a aaa aaa a an aaa aaa aa aie saaan 5 22  M  lti job feat  re ea da oerrinne aaa a a ia aA 5 22  Job  List S r S a ii eden a a ale he 5 22  Performing Operations on jODS           cccsssseeeeeeeseeeeneeeeseseeeeeeeeseneeeee 5 23  To check a job being performed             cccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeneeeeeeeeee 5 23  To check the printing Order            ccccccceceeeeeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeeseetaeeeeeeeeaee 5 24  TO delete a joburi ale sek e a cheatin eeethede at exible 5 25    When the message    Malfunction detected     appears     Call technical representative                ccccsssseeceeseseeeeeeesseeeeeeeseseeeeee 6 3  TOCOrMeCEING  CrOb a ficies case east a a en See eee de 6 4  When the message    Misfeed detected     appearS         s   eeceeesees 6 5  Location of paper misfeed               cccceeeeteeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeetaeeeeeeeesaeeeees 6 5  Paper misfeed indications             ccccceeeeeeeessesssneeceeseeeeeeeeeeeeeeseseseeees
222. on backed paper   Documents printed on paper thicker than 129 g m    Documents that are bound  for example  with staples or paper clips  Documents that are bound in a book or booklet   Documents that are bound together with glue   Document pages that have had cutouts removed or are cutouts  Label sheets   Offset printing masters   Documents with binder holes   Documents that have just been printed with this machine    XQ       Reminder  Before loading folded documents  such as those folded in half or in a  Zigzag  into the ADF  be sure to flatten the pages        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Copy paper original documents 8       Documents that can be placed on the original glass    To copy documents that cannot be loaded into the ADF  position them on  the original glass        Original glass documents       Document type Sheets  books  page spreads   three dimensional objects       Document size A3 m or less    11 x 17 Gor less             Maximum weight 2 kg       Precautions for positioning documents on the original glass    Observe the following precautions when placing the document on the  original glass     The size of documents printed on paper in metric sizes  such as A3  B4  and A4  cannot be automatically detected  The setting must be specified  by the technical representative  For details  contact the technical  representative    If a document of non standard paper size is loaded  the  Auto Paper  Select  and  Auto Zoom  settings cannot be used since the docume
223. on is per   formed and all settings return to their de   faults    This parameter cannot be set to  OFF  if   Enhance Security  is set to  ON  anda  user is logged on while user authentica   tion settings are specified  If this param   eter was set to  OFF  before  Enhance  Security  is set to  ON   the setting for  this parameter changes to  1 min   when   Enhance Security  is set to  ON     30 seconds  1 min   2 min   3 min   5  min   OFF             Auto Reset when Account is changed       Tab    Parameter    Description    Default setting       3 6          Auto Reset when  Account is  changed       Select whether or not the settings are re   set to their defaults when an access  code is entered or the key counter has  been removed        ON             12 16    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode       4in1 Copy Order       Tab Parameter Description    Default setting       4 6 4in1 Copy Order Select one of the following as the page  order when the  4 in 1  Orig   gt  Copy  setting is selected    Upper left gt Upper right gt Lower  left gt Lower right  Upper left gt Lower  left gt Upper right gt Lower right                Upper left gt Upper  right gt Lower  left gt Lower right       Default Quality Density Modes                            Tab Parameter Description Default setting  4 6 Default Densi    Select one of the following as the default   Auto  Quali  ty copy density setting   ty Densi  Auto  Manual  ty Modes  Origi    Select one of the following as the
224. onto the insertion  sheet  With double sided  copying  the two pages after the  separator are copied onto the  two sides of the insertion sheet      If  Blank  is selected  the       Insert paper of different size  han    or alternate direction  the original at the position  you wish to Sheet Insert     Set Method  Insert Sheet  A23  7                    a bidd   With Image  f A4D    i    Job List Menory100           insertion sheet is added at the location where the separator was    inserted         To cancel the  Insert Sheet  function  touch  OFF       S7    The Cover Paper screen appears         Selectthe paper tray loaded with the  paper for the insertion sheets     10 Press the  Start  key   Copying begins     Touch the button under  Insert Paper         Ready to copy                                      Henery 100     f Touch  Enter   and then touch  Enter  in the next screen that appears   8 Specify any other desired copy settings     J Using the keypad  type in the desired number of copies        9 8    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Application functions 9       9 3 Inserting paper between overhead projector  transparencies     OHP Interleave    function   In order to prevent copies printed onto overhead projector transparencies    from sticking together as a result of the heat that is produced during copying   paper  interleaves  can be inserted between the transparencies     Select either  With Image  or  Blank  to specify whether or not the copy is  printed ont
225. opy operation       4 9 Selecting a Combine Originals setting    Multiple document pages  mainly 2  4 or 8 pages  can be combined and  printed on a single page  reducing paper use             Note  The factory default settings are the recommended zoom ratios     Q    Detail   When a combined copy setting is selected  the recommended zoom ratio  is selected  and the document image is copied at a reduced size    The recommended zoom ratios for each setting are listed below    2 in 1  x0 707   4 in 1  x0 500    The machine can be set so that the recommended zoom ratios are not  recalled  For details  refer to  Zoom Ratio for Combine Booklets  on  page 12 15     When the  4 in 1  setting is selected  the page order  vertically or  horizontally  can be selected  For details  refer to  4in1 Copy Order  on  page 12 17     The following combined copies can be produced  depending on the Original  and Copy   Single Sided  and  Double Sided   settings selected in the  Simplex Duplex screen      amp     eee    Note  Combined copying is also possible with multiples of document pages  3   5  6 or 7 pages  not shown in the illustrations        4 46 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation          Setting    Original copy settings and description       2 in 1  page 4 46        Single Sided  gt  Single Sided  Two single sided documents is copied onto one double sided  sheet           Single Sided  gt  Double Sided  Four single sided documents are copied onto one double sid   ed 
226. or cleaning each part     Housing     gt  Clean the surface of the housing by  wiping it with a soft cloth dampened  with a mild household detergent                    Reminder  Be sure to turn off the machine  set the main power switch to    C      before  cleaning it     Never use solvents  such as benzene or thinner  to clean the housing     Original glass        gt  Clean the surface of the original  glass by wiping it with a soft  dry  cloth                  amp     Reminder  Never use solvents  such as benzene or thinner  to clean the original  glass        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  11 3    1 1 Care of the machine       Control panel        gt  Clean the control panel by wiping it  with a soft  dry cloth                 XQ       Reminder   Pressing too hard on a key in the control panel or on the touch panel may  damage them  In addition  never use a mild household detergent  glass  cleaner  benzene or thinner to clean the control panel or touch panel     Q    Detail   When cleaning the control panel  displaying the Panel cleaning screen  may prevent incorrect operations from being performed  For details  refer  to  Panel Cleaning  on page 12 24     Document pad        gt  Clean the document pad by wiping it  with a soft cloth dampened with a  mild household detergent                    11 4 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Care of the machine 1 1       Left partition glass    Clean the Left partition glass when the optional ADF is installed         gt  Clean the Le
227. or details on specifying the document  orientation  refer to  Selecting the document orientation  Original  Direction settings   on page 4 20    VY For details on using the original glass to scan multiple document pages   refer to  Scanning a multi page document from the original glass  on  page 4 15     1 In the Basics screen  touch Re o co   Simplex Duplex       Basics   Seugtagts  SYR   Application  The Simplex Duplex screen appears    ppaper Foon Sing lex  pups 000    Pee ee i    Mixed     Finishing 4d Original      Job List       2 Select the single sided copy settings EAA  according to the loaded document                Fora single sided document   touch  Single Sided  under   Orig   and  Single Sided  under   Copy         For a double sided document  oye o  B7  touch  Double Sided  under     Orig   and  Single Sided  under   Copy                                          Mob List Memory 100           MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  4 41    4 Basic copy operation       To select double sided copies    Y Asa factory default  the  Single Sided  Original setting and the  Single   Sided  Copy setting are selected    y Ifthe  Double Sided  Copy setting is selected  specify the position of the  binding margin and the loading orientation for the document  otherwise  the copies will not be printed as desired    For details on specifying the position of the binding margin  refer to   Selecting the position of the binding margin  Margin settings   on   page 4 22    For details on sp
228. or the following  parameters are forcibly changed in order to enhance security  The changed  parameters do not return to their original settings  even after  Enhance  Security  is canceled  Before setting  Enhance Security  to  ON   carefully  check the parameters that are to be changed        Changed parameters    Details of change       Password rules    Password rules are applied        Access locks    This parameter is enabled  If the password for an operation re   quiring a password is incorrectly entered three consecutive  times  the password can no longer be entered        Software SW    The software switch settings cannot be changed        Button display in the User Au   thentication screen     User List  does not appear        Allow Print without Authentica   tion    This parameter cannot be used        Auto Reset    This parameter cannot be set to  OFF    If this parameter is set to  OFF  before  Enhance Security  is  set to  ON   this parameter will change to  1 min         Restrict One Touch Editing     Restrict One Touch Editing  is set to  ON         Temporary overwrite data       Temporary overwrite data  is set to  ON         Cancel HDD Locking Password          The hard disk locking password setting can no longer be  changed              12 70    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode       Q    Detail  For details on the password rules  refer to    Password rules  on  page 12 78     For details on the access lock  refer to    Canceling an access lock 
229. ot be detected   Select paper size     A The document is not  positioned correctly    AA document with a  non standard size or with  a size too small to be de   tected is loaded     A Position the document cor   rectly    A Select the correct paper  size        This mode cannot be set with XXX     Functions that cannot be  used together are select   ed     Make copies using only one of  the functions        The Exit Tray has reached its max   imum capacity  Please remove all  copies from the tray as indicated  by the arrow s      Since the maximum  amount of copies for the  indicated finisher output  tray has been exceeded   the machine is unable to  make copies     Remove all copies from the in   dicated tray        Input User Name and Password to  login     User authentication set   tings have been speci   fied  Copies cannot be  made unless a user name  and its correct password  are entered     Type in your user name and  password   See  Controlling  machine use with user authen   tication  machine authentica   tion   on page 3 33         Input Account Name and Pass   word to login     Account track settings  have been specified   Copies cannot be made  unless an account name  and its correct password  are entered     Type in your account name  and password   See  Limiting  user access with account  track  on page 3 39         Account has reached its maximum  copy allowance  Please call your  administrator    The limit on the number  of pages that can be  printed has been 
230. ount User Auth           For details on displaying the Administrator Management 1 screen   refer to  Displaying the Administrator Management screen  on  page 12 25    The Account Authentication screen appears        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  12 31    12 Utility mode          Touch  User Authentication   e S  ON OFF      Uti lity Counter       The User Authentication ON OFF  screen appears        uthentication  oFF  4    Oc  Zh  ND  fa   kul   TP           weer    100     Specify the desired settings  and Enter general settings   then touch  Enter      Uti lity Counter            Specify settings for the  User  Authentication    Account Track   and  Synchronize  parameters   The  Synchronize  parameter  can be specified only if the  User  Authentication  and  Account  Track  parameters have been  set  For details on specifying the settings  refer to  Specifying  account data settings  on page 12 34 and  Specifying user  authentication settings  on page 12 42     To cancel changes to the settings  touch  Cancel      A screen appears  requesting confirmation to change the settings     User Auth  Account synchro   Setting Track nize       Ener                    cea  fl Eterna     l Server                     weer    100        Touch  Yes   and then touch  Enter   Select Yes to initialize Account Track    and User Authentication data                           If  Yes   then  Enter  was touched    Utility counter  the machine is restarted and all  account track and user  authe
231. ount track    If the account track settings have been set by the administrator  only users  of registered accounts can use this machine  In addition  the number of  prints produced with each account can be controlled     This is account track     VY When account track settings have been specified  only users that enter  registered account names and passwords can use this machine     Y Contact your administrator for passwords   Y A maximum of 1000 accounts can be registered     Touch  Account Name      Type in the account name  and then    touch  Enter      Touch  Password      Input Account Name _  and Password to login     Account Track           icco hans     Pascvord             pere  100       KICIN  BHUOHCOTCA  ADAMI  AROUENMLIL  j sace   LL   Aipha __   Caps                    E                         Input Account Name _  and Password to login              Peng  100        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     3 39    3 Before making copies          Type in the password  and then  touch  Enter         BONERS  ASCMOVHAWIEC   GBEE   SPACE   Je                      Press the  Access  key         Ifthe account name or password Access  was incorrectly entered  the input  screen appears again  Type in the Lime     correct account name and O  password  and then press the   Access  key     The Account Track screen  disappears  and the Basics screen  appears              Make copies using the desired copy settings        When you are finished printing  press  the  Access  key     A
232. pages are  automatically added at the end     For details on stapling  refer to    Binding copies at the center  on  page 4 60      f the document contains more than 80 pages  refer to  Scanning a  document in separate batches     Separate Scan    setting   on page 4 13     The width of the binding margin is automatically specified        9 22    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Application functions 9       To copy using the    Booklet    function    1 Position the document to be copied         For details on positioning the document  refer to  Feeding the  document  on page 4 9      gt           Touch  Application   and then touch EAA                                   Book Copy Repeat    The Book Copy Repeat screen By cas  appears     a kh                   Weel    wal i D  A  Enne   Reverse E geparate  Free                      3 Touch  Booklet        Tocancel the  Booklet  function   touch  Booklet  again to deselect  it                 i ESEE    EE or     Job List Menory100              IS  J gt     Specify any other desired copy settings     BR       Using the keypad  type in the desired number of copies     a  a      Press the  Start  key            Copying begins        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  9 23    Application functions       Printing additional information on copies  Image  Settings functions     A stamp  such as  CONFIDENTIAL  can be added to the center of  background copies  or a distribution number can be added when multiple    copies are made     The fol
233. parate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios  copies of the  document can be resized as desired     For details  refer to  Specifying separate horizontal and vertical zoom ratios   Individual Zoom settings   on page 4 35       mp  ec  fe    Scanning the document in separate batches                      A document with a large number of pages can be divided and scanned  together in separate batches  Double sided copies can be produced by  using the original glass  or the document pages can be loaded alternately  onto the original glass and into the ADF  and then all pages can be printed  together as a single job     For details  refer to  Scanning a document in separate batches     Separate  Scan    setting   on page 4 13 and  Scanning a multi page document from  the original glass  on page 4 15        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  1 9    Introduction       Sorting copies  A method for sorting the copies can be selected     For details  refer to  Separating copies by sets     Sort    setting   on page 4 54  and  Separating copies by pages     Group    setting   on page 4 55     Siecle     Stapling copies                Copies can be stapled together     For details  refer to  Stapling copies  staple settings   on page 4 56     7     ie m        Punching holes in copies                      Holes for filing can be punched in the copies     For details  refer to  Punching holes in copies  punch settings   on  page 4 58                       MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Introdu
234. parencies    After each overhead projector transparency copy is printed  a page can be  added to the stack as an interleaf     For details  refer to  Inserting paper between overhead projector  transparencies     OHP Interleave    function   on page 9 9        ABCIF  EE                 Adding a binding margin to copies    Copies can be printed with a filing margin so they can easily be stored in filing  binders     For details  refer to  Adding filing margins to copies     Page Margin     function   on page 9 11        2p                   MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  1 13    Introduction       Erasing sections of copies    Areas  such as the shadows of punched holes and transmission information  in received faxes  can be erased in copies     For details  refer to  Erasing unwanted areas of copies     Edge Frame Erase     function   on page 9 13     ABC   gt  ABC                Repeating copy images  A document image can be repeatedly printed on a single sheet of paper     For details  refer to  Tiling copy images     Image Repeat    function   on  page 9 15        933      sss             Separately copying a page spread    A page spread  such as in an open book or catalog  can be copied onto  separate pages     For details  refer to  Producing separate copies of each page in a page  spread     Book Copy    function   on page 9 18                    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Introduction 1       Copying with a layout of a book or magazine    Copies can be made with t
235. pec   ified or when the paper trays are switched  automatically        Thin    rl  Liz    Select this setting when thin paper with a weight of  50 g m  to 55 g m  is loaded    A paper tray with this setting is not automatically se   lected when the  Auto Paper Select  setting is spec   ified or when the paper trays are switched  automatically        Envelope    Select this setting when envelopes are loaded    A paper tray with this setting is not automatically se   lected when the  Auto Paper Select  setting is spec   ified or when the paper trays are switched  automatically           Single Sided Only    Select this setting when the paper that is loaded  should not be used with double sided copying  for  example  when one side has already been printed  on     A paper tray with this setting is given priority when  the  Auto Paper Select  setting is specified    A paper tray with this setting is not automatically se   lected during double sided copying        Recycled    Select this setting when the paper that is loaded  should not be given priority  for example  when recy   cled paper is loaded    A paper tray with this setting is not automatically se   lected when the  Auto Paper Select  setting is spec   ified        Special Paper                Select this setting when the paper that is loaded is  from a particular manufacturer or special paper that  is not usually used    A paper tray with this setting is not automatically se   lected when the  Auto Paper Select  setting 
236. pecified from the control  panel or touch panel  The default settings can be changed  For more  details  refer to  Specifying User   s Choice settings  on page 12 12    The factory default settings are the settings that were selected when this  machine was sent trom the factory     XQ       Note   A job can also be queued while the machine is warming up after the   Power   auxiliary power  key is turned on  For details  refer to  To scan  during warm up  on page 3 26    After the machine has finished warming up  the scanned image will be  printed    The machine takes about 14 seconds to warm up at normal room  temperature  23   C  when the  Power   auxiliary power  key is turned on  after the main power switch is turned on        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  3 25    Before making copies       To scan during warm up    1    Press the  Power   auxiliary power  key    The indicator on the  Start  key lights up in orange    A screen appears  indicating that the machine is warming up      How is the machine turned on      gt  For details on turning on the machine  refer to  To turn on the  machine  on page 3 24     After the warm up screen is Re o co  displayed  the Basics screen  appears     Meine Tou auy        Basics  Originais f Densi Application    Paper Zoom  After the message  Now warming  mE 000  up  Ready to scan   is displayed  the  message  Ready to copy   appears   The indicator on the  Start  key lights  up in green     amp Lex   Duplex    fined    Original      Job 
237. pen the front door                 a Lower lever FN1  and then remove  any paper                 3 Turn dial FN2               If the punch unit is installed  pull  out the hole punch waste  container                    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  10 19    1 0 Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers          4 Lower lever FN3  and then remove  any paper                 Return levers FN1 and FNS to their original positions   If the punch unit is installed  insert the hole punch waste container  into its original position     Ol       co       Lower lever FN4            j    Turn dial FN5 or dial FN6  and then  pull out any paper                 Return lever FN4 to its original position     CO  ee        10 20 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers 1 0          Open the misfeed clearing door  and  then pull out any misfed paper                    Raise the copy output tray  and then  push down the staple cartridge  holder and remove it                          Raise the shutter of the staple  cartridge holder  and then pull out  one sheet of staples                 Return the shutter to its original position        Insert the staple cartridge holder   and then push it up until it locks into  place         When inserting the staple  cartridge holder  be sure to insert  it so that it faces the correct  direction                                            MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 
238. per Zoom Dupiax  puse 000    Pet atone i f Wixed     Finishing 4d   Original      Job List vee     100          MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  4 15       4 Basic copy operation          5 Touch  Single Sided  under TF Raoi   Original  and  Double Si under WAG enkon  ete 1a a   oub Sided  de   Basics Griginais  oensiey  Application   Py J Paper Zoom    Orig     Copy  m  gt  D                                                                Single  H EET Er TIN  Sane    ideg            Job List emory 100     6 Press the  Start  key   Scanning begins     The message  To continue scanning   H 1 n  replace original and press Start  Noo B    appears               Job List Ju    7 Position the second page or second side of the document onto the  original glass  and then press the  Start  key         Toscan the remaining pages in the document  repeat steps 5  through 7     8 After all document pages have been scanned  touch  Finish      9 Press the  Start  key        4 16 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation       4 4 Specifying document settings    The following procedure describes how to specify the type of document to    be copied     Copying documents of mixed sizes     Mixed Original    setting     Documents of different sizes can be loaded together into the ADF to be fed  and scanned one by one automatically     Mixed originals paper sizes    The following chart shows the possible combinations of standard sized  paper that can be used with the  Mixed Original  set
239. perations      Q    Detail  A function other than a copy function cannot be selected while pages are  being scanned for copying or while copying is paused        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  4 5    Basic copy operation       Operations that cannot be combined  Certain copy settings cannot be used together     Specifying settings that cannot be combined will result in one of the   following    e The setting specified last is given priority   The setting specified first is  canceled     e The setting specified first is given priority   A warning message appears      XQ       Note  Depending on the combined operations and the selected paper type   some settings that can be specitied may not be applied     Operations where the setting specified last is given priority    The procedure for setting the  Book Copy  function after selecting the  4 in  1 setting is described below        1 Select the  4 in 1  setting  IT grisinals vijl be  plaged    age on glass and then press  8TaRr        Basics    Original  Direction      Job List Hemery 100                 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation          Set the  Book Copy  function     The  4 in 1  setting is automatically  canceled  and the Book Copy   function is set         Ready to copy           Combine f Quality  f   Application    Book Copy      Repeat run see Aa     Enter Ju         Basics                   ES ES ll  TEE J Book Copy     Booklet      Job List Memory 100              Ready to copy     i  Combi
240. ples   again to deselect it              3 Touch  Position Setting   and then  select the desired position        Basics  875 Application      Touch  Auto  to automatically Paper Zoom Bunian     determine the binding position Position Setting  according to the orientation of  the loaded document        4 Touch  Enter      The Finishing screen appears again        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  4 57    4 Basic copy operation       Punching holes in copies  punch settings     Q    Detail   Ifa punch setting is to be selected  select the orientation in which the  document is positioned  If an Original Direction setting is not selected   holes may not be punched in the copies as desired  For details on  specifying the document orientation  refer to  Selecting the document  orientation  Original Direction settings   on page 4 20     When finisher is installed       Paper Weight Paper Size                60 g m  to 90 g m  A3 m   to B5 G y       To punch holes in copies    1 In the Basics screen  touch Re o co   Finishing        Basics Sroa  Beasiey   Application       The Finishing screen appears     Paper Zoom Duplex  Buto 000    feini ehin    Mixed     Finishing 4   Original      Job List emery 100       2 Touch  Hole Punch   BSST riot SEP FTRE  Fo     appropriate orientati       To cancel the punch setting    touch  Hole  Punch  again to  deselect it           Henery 100           4 58 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation 4          Touch  Position Setting   and
241. ples run  out     Replace the staple car   tridge   See page 10 8         The staple is incorrectly  positioned by 90 degrees     Is the staple position cor   rectly specified     Specify the desired stapling  position   See page 4 56         The pages that were fed  out were not uniformly  loaded and the punched  holes or staples are incor   rectly positioned     Is the paper curled     Remove the paper from the  paper tray  turn it over  and  then load it again        Is there a gap between  the lateral guides in the  paper tray and the sides  of the paper     Slide the lateral guides in the  paper tray against the sides  of the paper so that there is  no gap           Even though a Punch set   ting was selected  holes  are not punched   when  punch unit is installed on  finisher        Did the message  Re   move punch scraps   ap   pear        Empty the hole punch  waste container        If any message other than those listed above appears  perform the operation  described in the message        6 30    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        Troubleshooting 6       If the problem is not corrected after the described operation is performed   contact your technical representative        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  6 31    Troubleshooting    6  6 8       Main messages and their remedies       Message    Possible cause    Remedy       Original left on glass     The document was left  on the original glass     Remove the document from  the original glass        Original size cann
242. plied  from the electrical outlet     Correctly insert the power  supply plug into the electri   cal outlet        Has the  Power   auxiliary  power  key been turned  on     Turn on the  Power   auxilia   ry power  key        Copying does not start     Is the right side door of  the machine open     Securely close the right side  door of the machine        Is there no paper that  matches the document     Load paper of the appropri   ate size into the paper tray        The printed output is too  light     Is the copy density set  too light     Touch  Dark  in the Density  screen to copy at the de   sired copy density     See page 4 45         Is the paper damp     Replace the paper with new  paper   See page 3 54   page 3 56 and page 3 58         The printed output is too  dark     Is the copy density set  too dark     Touch  Light  in the Density  screen to copy at the de   sired copy density   See  page 4 45         Was the document not  pressed close enough  against the original  glass     Position the document so  that it is pressed closely  against the original glass    See page 4 11         The printed output is blur   ry     Is the paper damp     Replace the paper with new  paper   See page 3 54   page 3 56 and page 3 58         Was the document not  pressed close enough  against the original  glass        Position the document so  that it is pressed closely  against the original glass    See page 4 11            There are dark specks or  spots throughout the  printed o
243. r  56 to 90 g m         Paper sizes    A3 a  B4     A4 G Q  B5 G    A5         Power requirements    Supplied from main unit       Power consumption    Less than 10 W       Dimensions    89 mm  W  x 419 mm  D  x 358 mm  H        Weight          2 2 kg       Reverse Automatic Document Feeder DF 605       Specifications       Document feed methods    Standard methods  Single sided and double sided doc   uments    Mixed Original  function  Combination of single sided  and double sided documents       Document types    Single sided  Plain Paper  35 to 128 g m    Double sided or mixed  Plain Paper  50 to 128 g m         Document sizes    Single sided double sided documents  A3 Ga  B4 aa  A4  G Q  B5 G    A5     Mixed document sizes  Refer to Table 1        Capacity of document feeder    Single sided double sided documents   Maximum 80 sheets  80 g m         Power requirements    Supplied from main unit       Power consumption    Less than 48 W       Dimensions    582 mm  W  x 558 mm  D  x 145 mm  H        Weight       9 4 kg          MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     7 5          Specifications       Table 1  Possible combinations for mixed document sizes                                                                                     Maximum Document   A3      A4 Q B4   B50 A4   ASQ B50   A50  Width    Document Size  A3 Gi O O  A4 U O O  B4 ta O O O O  BS a O O O O  A4 O O O O O O      AS i     O O O O   kz  B5          O O O O O    A5 Ga O O  O  Possible       Not possible    
244. r  key     The Utility Counter screen appears     2 Touch  Admin  Management      The Administrator Code screen  appears     3 Usethe keypad to type in the 8 digit  administrator access code  and then  touch  Enter        To change the entered value   press the  C   clear  key  and then  enter the correct value     To cancel changes to the  settings  touch  Cancel     The Administrator Management   screen appears     4     Touch  Admin  1  or  Admin  2      Uti lity Counter  a le  Setting jj   Management    TEATA enmnep    Management  Reports      Printer    Setting    otal  Counter  0    Total Copy  Counter    0  Total    Copy Size       Input Administrator Code     Uti I i ty Counter             S  Administrator Code  ae            Herer 100        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode       To exit the Administrator  Management screen  touch   Enter  in each screen until the  Basics screen appears        lity Counter                     Administrator Man   afdinini strator  Management vomEnter_          Admin  1 J Admin  2 J          Henery 100     The Administrator Management 1 or Administrator Management 2  screen appears           Administrator Management 1 screen    Administrator Management 2 screen       Utility Counter          Adninistrator Management 1             d  Admin  Set    Account   User Auth  j  TX Settings   RX Settings   Print Lists   Be amp  inos    uSnagement    Hea     100                          Utility Counter             Ener            Ad
245. r or not the  Access  key be pressed when logging off     Settings at time of purchase                      Bit 76543210  Setting 00000000  HEX  00   Specifying the setting    The shaded cells indicate the settings selected at the time of purchase        Bit    Description    Setting    Description       7 6 5    000     Do not change these  bits when specifying  settings for this func   tion        Specify whether or  not the  Access  key  be pressed when log   ging off     Specifies that the  Ac   cess  key not be  pressed when logging  off        Specifies that the  Ac   cess  key be pressed  when logging off        3 2  1 0             0000        Do not change these  bits when specifying  settings for this func   tion           MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     12 61       Utility mode       Specifying use of registered user authentication information to log on to  the LDAP server  mode 466     Specify whether or not user names and passwords registered with user  authentication are used to log on to the LDAP server     Settings at time of purchase                      Bit 76543210  Setting 00000000  HEX  00   Specifying the setting    The shaded cells indicate the settings selected at the time of purchase                          Bit Description Setting Description  7 Select whether or not   0 Not used for logon  the user name pass   word used for exter    1 Used for logon  nal server  authentication is used  to log on to the LDAP  server   6 5 4 3 2 1 0                  
246. r the number stored with the  image      To cancel the  Image Overlay     function  touch  Cancel   call  Cap JE Bsp                                     Job List       9 32 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Application functions       4 Selecta paper tray loaded with  paper         To cancel changes to the  settings  touch  OFF      5 Press the  Start  key   The overlay image is printed             Note       Select the copy paper  then press    the Start Key      Combine fa  Originals 7             The size of the scanned area appears on buttons where an image is    stored        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     9 33    9 Application functions       9 11 Copying with light and dark coloring inversed     B W  Reverse    setting     A document can be copied with the light and dark coloring or the black and  white coloring  gradations  of the image inversed                    To copy using the    B W Reverse    setting    Position the document to be copied       For details on positioning the document  refer to  Feeding the  document  on page 4 9        Touch  Application   and then touch ESAO   B W Reverse        To cancel the  B W Reverse  T    i o  setting  touch  B W Reverse   Gover Mode     Shest J   thea  again to deselect it  lag  HEPA B  7 ant arePy       isl  I ao  S828 nos    Reverse    Seba   ots                                                         Mob List Memory 100     Specify any other desired copy settings   Using the keypad  type in the desired number of copi
247. ratio  on page 4 38    Y Touch to enlarge the zoom ratio  and touch  zoom ratio in x0 001 increments     to reduce the       1 In the Basics screen  touch  Zoom   E o  The Zoom screen appears    Basics   SeiSbASe   SEALY   Application    Paper Zoom Duplex     pesn 000    TFR E  Finishing 3   origina      Job List emery 100       2 Touch  Minimal   Ready to        Basics Sempane   Suatty   application    Paper   0 930   Ee    x0  25044  000                                           Terere                  MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  4 31    Basic copy operation       Finely adjusting the zoom ratio    The zoom ratio can be finely increased or reduced in x0 001 increments in  order to copy at the desired size     1    In the Basics screen  touch  Zoom      The Zoom screen appears     2 Adjust the zoom ratio         Touch to increase the    zoom ratio  and touch   to  reduce the zoom ratio   The zoom ratio is increased or    reduced in x0 001 increments        Hold down the button to change    the zoom ratio in larger  increments        ombine   Quatity  Application      Basics Originals   Densi    Paper Zoon dup las     a  Finishing j  original      Job List                                                    Basics  Srima  oensiey f Application  Paper Duplex  Auto Zoom                            4 32    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation 4       Selecting a preset zoom ratio  Enlarge and Reduce settings     The most suitable zoom ratios for copying from com
248. re the  misteed occurs  Determine the misfeed location by looking at the  illustration displayed with the error message  and then clear the misfeed  according to the appropriate procedure          Job List       MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  6 5    Troubleshooting       Paper misfeed indications                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                                 Description       A paper misfeed in the ADF  page 6 7        A paper misfeed in the automatic duplex unit  page 6 13   A paper misfeed in the 1st tray  page 6 15        A paper misfeed in the fusing unit  page 6 9        A paper misfeed in the bypass tray  page 6 14        A paper misfeed in the 2nd tray  page 6 15        A paper misfeed in the 3rd or 4th tray  page 6 16        A paper misfeed in the LCT  page 6 17        A paper misfeed in the finisher  page 6 18        A paper misfeed in the mailbin kit  page 6 20                 A paper misfeed in the saddle stitcher  page 6 22           6 6    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Troubleshooting 6       To clear a paper misfeed in the ADF       4    i    Pull up the lever for the misfeed   clearing cover  and then open the  cover                    2 Carefully pull out any misfed paper                   
249. recautions       Installation         A WARNING    Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death    gt  Do not ignore this safety advices           Warning Symbol       e Do not place a flower vase or other container that contains  water  or metal clips or other small metallic objects on this  product  Spilled water or metallic objects dropped inside the  product could result in a fire  electrical shock  or breakdown   Should a piece of metal  water  or any other similar foreign  matter get inside the product  immediately turn OFF the pow   er switch  unplug the power cord from the power outlet  and  then call your authorized service representative     OV                               A CAUTION    Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property    gt  Do not ignore this safety advices           Caution       e After installing this product  mount it on a secure base  If the  unit moves or falls  it may cause personal injury        e Do not place the product in a dusty place  or a site exposed  to soot or steam  near a kitchen table  bath  or a humidifier   A fire  electrical shock  or breakdown could result        e Do not place this product on an unstable or tilted bench  or  in a location subject to a lot of vibration and shock  It could  drop or fall  causing personal injury or mechanical break   down        e Do not let any object plug the ventilation holes of this prod   uct  Heat could accumulate inside the product  resulting in a  fire
250. reement  When  the message  There is no Toner   Paper  core Bupiox  appears  the machine stops operating    ii    ombine f Qualit       Basics  originals   oensaey   Application    E a  Finishing d Original      Job List emery 100        When the toner has run out    When the toner bottle is empty  the  message shown below appears   Immediately replace the toner bottle     Q    Detail   For details on replacing the toner  bottle  refer to  Replacing the toner  bottle  on page 10 3     There is no Toner   Please exchange toner           6 26 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Troubleshooting 6       6 6   When the message    Stapler empty     appears  When the staple cartridge is empty  the message  Stapler empty   appears   Replace the staple cartridge     Example  Message when the finisher has ESE TAE Br cancel staple       run out of staples    bi   Quality    pare  Application             he Xo j  eminder  gt   A  Non Sort    Won sort    2 Staples   Staples   Be sure to replace the staple cartridge a    only after the message appears     gt  m r oup  otherwise the machine may be Menory 190   Free  damaged   Detail    For details on replacing the staple cartridge  refer to    Replacing the  staple cartridge  on page 10 8        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  6 27    6    Troubleshooting       6 7    Basic troubleshooting       Symptom    Possible cause    Remedy       Main  Unit       The machine does not  start up when the main    power switch is turned on     Is no power sup
251. ry 100     ny     lt  __ Type in the user name  and then User Nane Gancel_  Enter _    touch  Enter   a aah  BOWED OO0R8  SIGS  SWIMM                                  User A r  Authentication                        Henery 100        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  3 33    Before making copies       Type in the password  and then  touch  Enter      Touch  Login      If the user name or password was  incorrectly entered  the input  screen appears again  Type in the  correct user name and password   and then touch  Login    Instead of touching  Login   press  the  Access  key to complete the  operation                  TAE  erie   SHAH0ruunEg  AOFM  IRICEN IL   SPACE   Je                                            Henery 100     Input User Name and Password to login     User  Au       KAKAKRARRE     Password    oo                ene    100x    The User Authentication screen disappears  and the Basics screen    appears     Make copies using the desired copy settings     When you are finished printing  press  the  Access  key     A message appears  requesting  confirmation to log off        Access    e   O             The User Authentication screen  appears                  Yes    UserName Carol ine          Honor 100           3 34    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies 3    Q    Detail  For details on specifying settings for machine authentication  refer to   Specifying account data settings  on page 12 34        For details on logging on when external server aut
252. ry 100  2 Select the paper tray loaded withthe jg o co  desired paper  ee eae  paR   Basics   SPiSbASe   SYRHY   Application  Paper Zoom Duplex   gutocbaper le                                seers   peso       Job List emery 100          MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  4 27    Basic copy operation       Specifying a Zoom setting    The zoom ratio can be set in order to make a copy on paper with a size  different than the document or to enlarge or reduce the size of the copy  image     The following procedures describe how to specify the Zoom setting      amp         Note  The factory default setting is  x1 0      As a factory default  the  Auto Zoom  setting and the  Auto Paper Select   setting cannot both be selected at the same time  If the  Auto Zoom   setting is selected while the  Auto Paper Select  setting was selected   the Paper screen appears  In the Paper screen  specify the desired Paper  setting    However  the software switch settings can be used to allow the  Auto  Zoom  setting and the  Auto Paper Select  setting to be selected at the  same time  For details on the software switch settings  refer to   Specifying software switch settings  machine functions     on   page 12 52        4 28    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation 4       Automatically selecting the zoom ratio     Auto Zoom    setting    The most appropriate zoom ratio is automatically selected based on the size  of the loaded document and the specified paper size    1 In the Basics s
253. s           To cancel the setting  touch the  button again to deselect it                             MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  4 49    4 Basic copy operation       4 10 Selecting finishing for copies    Various settings are available for sorting and finishing copies that are fed out             Note  The factory default setting is  Non Sort      Q    Detail   If no finisher is installed and the following conditions are met  printed  copies can be fed out and sorted grouped in an alternating crisscross  pattern  crisscross sorting and crisscross grouping       A4 or B5 paper is used      Paper of the same size and type is loaded with the G  orientation in one  paper tray and with the  d orientation in another tray      The  Auto Paper Select  setting is selected      The  Mixed Original  setting is not selected      The  Cover Mode  and    Insert Sheet  functions are not set      The  Image Repeat  function is not set     Select the  Booklet  function in the Book Copy Repeat screen of the  Application screen when center binding   Crease  and  2 Staples   settings  is set        4 50 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation 4       The following six finishing settings are available                                                                 Setting Description  Non Sort Select this setting to copy without using a Finishing setting   Sort Select this setting to separate each set of a multi page document   i   Th  4  2  1  Shift Sorting Crisscross Sorting  E
254. s       9 Dial Turned to move the staple cartridge holder to   ward you when replacing the staple cartridge or  clearing jammed staples             10 Dial FN5 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the  finisher   11 Dial FN6 Turned when clearing paper misfeeds within the  finisher                Output Tray OT 601       No  Part name Description                  12 Optional output tray Collects copies         Punch Unit PU 501       No  Part name Description         13 Punch Unit  Punches holes for filing printed pages when  punch unit is installed onto finisher                Parts marked with an asterisk     are installed within the finisher and therefore  are not shown in the illustration     Precautions for using the finisher   e Do not place objects on top of the saddle stitcher or mailbin kit   e Do not place objects below the output trays of the finisher                          MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  3 15    Before making copies       Control panel                                                                                                                                                                         1 2 3 4 5 6     _                         _         i Extra ican Fax  can Ciloy rat  tL 7  DEF Interruy    jE 8  Power    Accessblly Prot Copy 9  21   WXYZ 3  Stop  Enlarge Display  20        ZO 10  O Contrast        Q CH  N was _7  19 18 17 1514 13 12  No  Part name Description   1 Touch panel Displays various screens and messages   Specify the 
255. s checked      gt  Touch  CHECK  to check the specified key repeat settings     4 Touch  Enter      The Accessibility Settings screen appears again        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Additional copy operations       To set the    Extend Auto Reset    function    If no operation is performed for a specified length of time  an automatic panel  reset operation is performed and all settings in the touch panel return to their  default settings  It is possible to specify the length of time that a confirmation  screen is displayed before the settings return to their defaults     V For details on the automatic panel reset operation  refer to  Automatically  returning to the default settings  Automatic panel reset   on page 3 29     V The factory default setting is  OFF     1 Display the Accessibility Settings screen   For details  refer to   page 5 15     Touch  Extend Auto Reset     The Extend Auto Reset screen appears    3 Select the setting for the desired  length of time that the confirmation Confirmation Screen should appear     Extend Auto Reset  OOO O    N             screen is displayed     Touch  30 sec     60 sec     90       sec   or  120 sec     G0 sec   Bo sec         To reset the settings to their    defaults without displaying a  confirmation screen  touch  OFF            A     amp  Touch  Enter      Q    Detail   The operations where the machine enters Low Power mode or Sleep  mode or where the touch panel is darkened are not affected by the time  specified for t
256. s operating   The number of pages that can be printed after the message  Please  exchange toner   appears and before the message  There is no Toner    appears differs depending on the printing conditions  the consumables  and the part to be replaced  After the first message appears  prepare to  replace the toner bottle according to your maintenance agreement     When the toner is empty  the warning  message shown below appears and  copies can no longer be made     There is no Toner   Please exchange toner       Job List           MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  10 3    10    Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers       Nie    Note  When the message appears  replace the toner bottle according to your  maintenance agreement     Q    Detail  For details on replacing the toner bottle  refer to  To replace the toner  bottle  on page 10 5          A CAUTION    Handling toner and toner bottles   gt  Do not throw toner or the toner bottle into a fire      gt  Toner expelled from the fire may cause burns           A CAUTION    Precautions for toner spills    gt  Be careful not to spill toner inside the machine or get toner on your  clothes or hands     gt   f your hands become soiled with toner  immediately wash them with  soap and water     gt  If toner gets in your eyes  immediately flush them with water  and then  seek professional medical attention         amp         Reminder  Be sure to replace the toner bottle only after the message  There is no  
257. sages appear in the  touch panel   English  German  French  Italian  Span   ish  Japanese                    amp     Note    f user authentication is performed to log onto the machine  then the  display language is changed  it will no longer be possible to log on to the  machine normally with the next authentication  In this case  it will be  necessary to change the software switch settings  For details  contact  your technical representative        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  12 13    Utility mode       Machine Authentication PW Change       Tab    Parameter    Description    Default Setting       1 6          Machine Authenti   cation PW Change       The password entered for machine au   thentication with user authentication can  be changed   e Current Password   Type in the currently specified ma   chine authentication password   e New Password   Type in the new machine authentica   tion password   e Confirm New Password   Type in the new machine authentica   tion password again for confirmation                      Note    This parameter appears only when the machine is being used with the  machine user authentication settings specified     Default setting Simplex Duplex                                                          Tab Parameter Description Default Setting  2 6 Default setting Select one of the following as the default   121  Simplex Duplex Single Double Sided setting   If the  Simplex   gt  Duplex  parameter in  the Tech  Rep  Choice screen is set to   dupl
258. scanned   The amount of memory available can be checked beside  Memory  Free  in the lower right corner of the Basics screen             Job List jl       MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  4 13    Basic copy operation            To delete the scanned image  press the  Stop  key  and then delete  the job  For details  refer to  Stopping deleting a job  on page 4 63   In addition  the job can be deleted from the Job List screen  For  details  refer to  To delete a job  on page 5 25     3 After all document pages have been scanned  touch  Finish      4 Press the  Start  key        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation 4       Scanning a multi page document from the original glass    When making double sided or combined copies using the original glass   place each page of a multi page document on the original glass to scan it   The following procedure describes how to place single sided document  pages on the original glass to make double sided copies     1 Lift open the original cover or ADF     2 Position the first page or the first side of the document face down onto  the original glass          For details on positioning the document  refer to  To place the  document on the original glass  on page 4 11        When loaded in the When loaded in the  W orientation  Ga orientation              3 Close the original cover or ADF     4 In the Basics screen  touch Re o co   Simplex Duplex   wane     Basics  52m   38a   Application  The Simplex Duplex screen appears     Pa
259. seeeeeeeeeeeees 8 9  Order for selecting the paper trays          cceeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeneeteentereenees 8 9       MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  Contents 7          8 2 Specifying paper settings for the bypass tray            ccsssseeeeesseees 8 10  To specify the paper size  Change Setting                  ccceeeeeeeeeees 8 10  To specify a non standard paper size  Custom Size settings        8 11  To store a non standard paper size  Custom Size settings           8 13  To specify a setting for special paper  Change Setting                 8 15  8 3 Original GOCUMEIS   cs  fis  ceccccceccecce de ccesee decece cescceet ceed decade cencenetieceeede 8 17  Documents that can be loaded Into the ADF                 cceeeeeeeeees 8 17  Precautions for loading documents Into the ADF                 000 8 8 18  Documents that can be placed on the original glass                 4  8 19  Precautions for positioning documents on the original glass        8 19  9 1 Adding cover pages     Cover Mode    function                 sccsssseeeeeees 9 3  To copy using the    Cover Mode    function    sesser 9 4  9 2 Inserting cover pages     Insert Sheet    function          2   cssseeeeeeeees 9 6  To copy using the    Insert Sheet    function       sseereeeeerrerenennn 9 7  9 3 Inserting paper between overhead projector transparencies      OHP Interleave    function             c e eeceesseeeeeeeeneeeneeeeeeeneneeeeeeseseeeees 9 9  To copy using the    OHP Interleave    function sese 9 9  9 4 A
260. selected     gt  For details  refer to  To specify a  setting for special paper  Change  Setting   on page 8 15              Hener  100        6 Touch  Enter      The Paper screen appears again   The paper size for the bypass tray is set     Reminder   If paper other than the specified paper size is loaded  a paper misfeed  may occur since the paper size is not automatically detected    To specify a non standard paper size  Custom Size settings   Non standard sized paper can be loaded only into the bypass tray     If non standard sized paper is loaded  it will be necessary to specify the    paper size   l In the Basics screen  touch  Paper   E o co  The Paper screen appears  f  semens   gualtey   application    Zoom Duplex  000    e n       Mixed     Finishing 4   Original       Job List emory 100          2 Select the button for the bypass tray                                                    Basics Grisinais  bensiey   Application   Co      SEE  far   am  E F A4D MESSA j          1 Ce     Touch  Change Setting         MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  8 11    Copy paper original documents       Touch  Custom Size   Select paper type and size for  the Bypass Tray     The Custom Size screen appears              Size    i  Heer  100        How can the size of paper loaded into the bypass tray be selected      gt  For details  refer to  To specify a setting for special paper  Change  Setting   on page 8 15        Type in the length  X  and width  Y  of EZ e desired co            
261. settings  Proof Copy   Before printing a large number of copies  a single proof copy can be printed  to be checked  This prevents copy errors from occurring    To make test prints  1 Position the document to be copied   Refer to page 4 9 for details        The  Proof Copy  function can be used only if the machine has  been set for 2 or more copies   2 Select the desired copy settings   3 Press the  Proof Copy  key   A single proof copy is printed  Proof Copy  4 Check the proof copy       If the proof copy was printed as desired  skip to step 8    To change the copy settings  continue with step 5   5 Touch  Change Setting  in the screen  that appeared when the proof copy  was printed   Beginin D   Job List  JF  5 6 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Additional copy operations    5       AR            Note  The number of copies printed for the proof copy is included in the number  of copies that are specified  If the setting was changed  use the keypad  to enter the number copies     In the Proof copy screen  change the  copy settings as desired     The Finishing settings appear in  the Proof copy screen only if they  have been specified for the job  being proofed  If the copy  settings cannot be changed  stop  printing the proof copy  Next   press the  Reset  key to cancel    Select the mode    mesier    J 2 Staples    Hole Punch    H if    Position  BE el Betting     Henery 100                    the copy settings  and then specify the desired settings     Press the  Proof Copy
262. sheet           Double Sided  gt  Single Sided  One double sided document is copied onto one single sided    5   r               Double Sided  gt  Double Sided  Two double sided documents are copied onto one double   sided sheet                    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     4 47       Basic copy operation          Setting    Original copy settings and description          4in 1  page 4 46     Single Sided  gt  Single Sided  Four single sided documents are copied onto one single sid   ed sheet           Single Sided  gt  Double Sided  Eight single sided documents are copied onto one double   sided sheet           Double Sided  gt  Single Sided  Two double sided documents are copied onto one single sid   ed sheet     J               Double Sided  gt  Double Sided  Four double sided documents are copied onto one double   sided sheet              4 48    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        Basic copy operation 4       Copying multiple document pages onto a single page  combined copy  settings     1 In the Simplex Duplex screen  select the appropriate settings under   Orig   and  Copy  for the desired combined copy   For details  refer to  page 4 40      2 In the Basics screen  touch Re o co   Combine Originals      S ne T oaae    Basics Originais  Density    Application  The Combine Originals screen Paper Zoon Sing lex  appears  pase 000       Finishing 4   Original      Job List       3 Select the desired combined copy Ready to copy   settings            o    Basics semana
263. shines through the  original glass is bright  it is not a laser beam and  therefore  is not as  dangerous     Lift open the original cover or ADF     Position the document face down onto the original glass          Load the document pages so that the top of the document is  toward the back or the left side of the machine           When loaded in the When loaded in the  W orientation  Ga orientation                 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  4 11    Basic copy operation       Align the document with the  4  mark in the back left corner of the  document scales     For details on selecting the  orientation of the document  refer  to  Selecting the document  orientation  Original Direction  settings   on page 4 20    For details on specifying the  binding margin position  refer to          Document scales                 Selecting the position of the binding margin  Margin settings   on    page 4 22    For transparent or translucent  documents  place a blank sheet  of paper of the same size as the  document over the document     For bound documents spread  over two facing pages  such as a  book or magazine  position the  top of the document toward the  back of this machine and align  the spine of the document with  the book mark in the document  scale  as shown    For details on copying books   refer to  Producing separate           Blank sheet     of paper                      copies of each page in a page spread     Book Copy    function   on    page 9 18     Close the origi
264. sired user  touch  User Bath  Number   and then use the  keypad to type in the user                User 3  Registration             number   A screen for selecting a user number  anne  Select the desired user number  Press START to print the counter     User Registration      Select a tab  and then touch the  button for the desired user  number     The User Information screen  appears                       Bree    100     Touch  Delete User        If this machine is being used with  machine authentication settings          specified   Delete User  does not User Name    appear for users that have been Password iis  Geperal      authenticated      Counter J  Baete    d              this User         To exit the User Authentication ty  screen  touch  Enter  in each Enter    screen until the Basics screen  appears     A screen for selecting a user number  appears again               22100        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  12 51    12    Utility mode       12 10 Specifying software switch settings  machine    functions     By specifying the software switch settings   Mode Selection    Bit Selection   and  Hex Selection    various machine functions can be changed to meet  your specific needs     Nie    Reminder  Do not change any modes or bits other than those described in this  manual     XQ       Note  When  Enhance Security  is set to  ON   the software switch settings  cannot be changed     Software SW settings       Parameter Description       Mode Selection Specify the thr
265. stead of touching  Login   press  the  Access  key to complete the  operation    Input User Name and Password to login   Select the domain from  Domain Name     User A J  Authentication      Login    Caroline                 User Name            Domain Name Sal inger    Henery 100        Password    KERRKRKKE                               Henery 100     Input User Name and Password to login   Select the domain from  Domain Name      Caroline    User  Authentication                      D xxxeeeeeex    P Pandai aeie  gt     Domain Name   Salinger  Hener100              The User Authentication screen disappears  and the Basics screen  appears     Make copies using the desired copy settings     When you are finished printing  press  the  Access  key     A message appears  requesting  confirmation to log off        Access  Lime                  MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     3 Before making copies    The User Authentication screen  appears                 Yes    UserName   Caroline          Honor 100     Q    Detail   External server authentication settings can be specitied using the User  Authentication parameters in Administrator mode  available trom the  Utility mode  Settings should be specified by the administrator     For details on specifying settings for external server authentication  refer  to  To register a user with external server authentication  on page 12 44        3 38 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies    3       Limiting user access with acc
266. sted below     Code  M4         Job List        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     11    Care of the machine          MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        1 2 Utility mode       Utility mode       O  12 Utility mode    12 1 Overview of Utility mode parameters    List of registration information and parameters    This section describes the buttons available when the  Utility Counter  key is  pressed     XQ       Note  The buttons that appear in the screens differ depending on the specitied  settings     Buttons marked with    ma iy not appear depending on the specified  settings or whether specitic options are installed  For details  refer to the  corresponding page for the button     The names of buttons marked with  ma y be different when fax kit is  installed     For details on the buttons marked with 3 refer to the User manual   Facsimile Operations      For details on buttons marked with a refer to the User manual  Network  Scanner Operations      For details on buttons marked with 9  refer to the User manual  Print  Operations      For details on the buttons marked with 6 refer to the User manual  Box  Operations       f user authentication settings have been specified and the   Utility Counter  key is pressed without performing user authentication   only the buttons marked with 4 appear        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  12 3    Utility mode          Utility Counter       User Setting       User   s  Choice   p  12 12        1 6    Mixed Origi   nal Detection       Langu
267. t  vee      100       MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation       3    zi    Touch  Individual Zoom      The Individual Zoom screen appears     Using the keypad  type in the desired  zoom ratios for side X and side Y   between x0 250 and x4 000          If a value outside the allowable  range is specified  the message   Input Error  appears  Type a  value within the allowable range        Ifthe value was incorrectly  entered  press the  C   clear  key         Basics Griginals   Densi    gamre fosati 7 Application                                 Sinplex   Paper EI    Saries                                  XY Zoon  Ezz   Set Zoom     dogivids      x0  25044  000          a eS a aL ee  Hi  1 000    lt 1 000   W  lt 0 930        Job List vee      100                o 00 o  0    Sempine   Quality    Application                                                               Basics Originals   Densi  F z  Paper EI     Serie     LANNE  Individual Zoon Enter              gt     ae  1 x0  250 4 000     oa   xO  250 4 000      Job List vee     100    in the keypad to erase the value  and then specify the correct value     Touch  Enter      The Zoom screen appears again        4 36    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation 4       Selecting a stored zoom ratio    Copy zoom ratios that have been stored can be recalled to be used when  desired   In addition  stored copy zoom ratios can be changed     Y Stored zoom ratios can be changed to desired zoom ratios 
268. t Memory 100             What do the Book Erase settings do    gt  Ifa Book Erase setting is selected  the dark shadows around the  document or along the center of the document can be erased     Touch  Enter   and then touch  Enter  in the next screen that appears        In the Basics screen  touch  Paper    and then select the paper tray loaded  with the paper       Basics gamans  Sualitey   application       Paper Zoom Duplex    EEE  Ato   a  Chi  z  gt  A4D  s                                                                   Job Tist   00       9 20    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Application functions       9 Specify any other desired copy settings   10 Using the keypad  type in the desired number of copies     11 Press the  Start  key   Copying begins     XQ       Note   For details on scanning a document with  Page Order  set to  Book  Order   refer to  Scanning a multi page document from the original  glass  on page 4 75        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     9 21    Application functions       Creating booklet copies     Booklet    function     Double sided copies of the document pages are arranged so that the copies  can be read like a bound book when it is folded in half  Stapling is available  only if optional finisher is installed                       Detail   Generally  a multiple of 4 document pages is required with a single sided  document  and a multiple of 2 document pages is required with a double   sided document  If there are not enough pages  blank 
269. t the job that you wish to delete          Ifthe job that you wish to delete  Job List 2 24 17 17  Exit                                                                                                                                                                                  is not displayed  touch   Jo  leraz   print  type   voc    until the desired job is Status _____User Nane Revd   displayed   ae J A  The screen for deleting the selected    f2ta8ing JW 18458           job appears   Dialing VARY 2nd Dest                             S ding atesaki std  i  Job List PAAS Henory 70   3 Check the information that is Cepten iad 97 3 17 24  displayed  and then touch  Delete   j bate  one i EA 3 A728 reepnesncnarnseneieinernertrs i       i Job No    The selected job is deleted  no  ot Sip  _ver Aocout ener  Job List PAAS Henory 704        4 Touch  OK      Q    Detail    A job can also be deleted after the  Stop  key is pressed  For details  refer  to  Stopping deleting a job  on page 4 63     The Job List screen appears again        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  5 25    5 Additional copy operations          5 26 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        6 Troubleshooting       Troubleshooting 6       PT    saa  6 Troubleshooting    6 1 When the message    Malfunction detected     appears   Call technical representative   If a malfunction that cannot be corrected by the user occurred  the message     Malfunction detected  Please call your Technical Representative   appears    call t
270. t when fax kit is  installed     Q    Detail   The Default LCD Screen setting specifies the default screen when the  automatic panel reset operation is performed or the machine is turned  off  then on again    In order to check the setting after it has been changed  turn the machine  off with the main power switch  and then wait about 10 seconds before  turning it on again  The machine may not operate correctly if it is turned  on immediately after being turned off  For details on turning the machine  off and on  refer to    Turning on the main power and the auxiliary power   on page 3 24        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  12 21       Utility mode       Default Device                                  Tab Parameter Description Default setting  6 6 Default Device Select one of the following as the mode   Copy  given priority   Copy  Printer  Image Quality  ADF   Tab Parameter Description Default setting  6 6 Image Quality Select one of the following as the image   Left    ADF  quality level for the ADF  Modet1  for density             e Left   Modet1  for density correction   For reproducing faint documents   such as those written in pencil   e Right   Mode2  standard   For normal documents       correction              12 22    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode    12       12 3 Specifying User Management settings    From the User Management screen  settings for more comfortable use of the    machine can be specified  such as the volume     The following procedure
271. the character  to the left of the cursor       6  5  4  3  2  1 0             0000000  Do not change these  bits when specifying  settings for this func   tion              12 66    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        Utility mode       Specifying settings for limiting user authentication to only Scan  functions  mode 479     Specify whether or not user authentication is performed only when the   Fax Scan  or  Extra Scan  key is pressed     Settings at time of purchase                   Bit 76543210  Setting 00000000  HEX  00   Specifying the setting    The grayed out cells are the settings at the time of purchase                          Bit Description Setting Description  7 6 5    renee enn ennnnnemnann 000  Do not change these  bits when specifying  settings for this func   tion   4  3 2 1 0 Specifies whether or 11001 Limited  not to limit authenti   cation on Fax and 00000 Not limited  Scan functions                   Reminder    Do not specify settings for mode 479 other than those described in   Specifying the setting      Q    Detail     f user authentication is limited to Scan functions  touch  Account User  Auth   in the Administrator Management 7 screen  and then select     External Server  as the user authentication method  For details on the  user authentication method  refer to  Specifying the  account authentication settings  User Authentication ON OFF  parameters   on page 12 37        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     12 67          12    Utility mode       12
272. the ma   chine is in Interrupt mode  the indicator on the   Interrupt  key lights up in green and the mes   sage  Now in Interrupt mode   appears on the  touch panel  To cancel Interrupt mode  press  the  Interrupt  key again        9  Power   auxiliary power  key    Press to turn on and off machine operations  for  example  for copying  printing or scanning   When turned off  the machine enters a state  where it conserves energy        10  Stop  key    Press the  Stop  key during copying to stop the  copy operation        11  Start  key    Press to start copying  When this machine is  ready to begin copying  the indicator on the   Start  key lights up in green  If the indicator on  the  Start  key lights up in orange  copying can   not begin    Press to restart a stopped job  For details on  jobs  refer to  Job List screens  on page 5 22       12 Main Power indicator    Lights up in green when the machine is turned  on with the main power switch       13  Proof Copy  key    Press to print a single proof copy to be checked  before printing a large number of copies   See  page 5 6        14 Keypad    Use to type in the number of copies to be pro   duced    Use to type in the zoom ratio    Use to type in the various settings        15  C   clear  key    Press to erase a value  such as the number of  copies  a zoom ratio  or a size  entered using the  keypad        16  Mode Check  key    Press to display screens showing the specified  settings        17  Utility Counter  key    
273. these conditions be found  immediately turn  OFF the power switch  unplug the power cord from the pow   er outlet  and then call your authorized service representa   tive                       MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  2 5    2 Installation and operation precautions       Power source         A WARNING    Ignoring this warnings could cause serious injury or even death    gt  Do not ignore this safety advices           Warning       e Use only the specified power source voltage  Failure to do  that could result in a fire or electrical shock        e Connect power plug directly into wall outlet having the same  configuration as the plug  Use of an adapter leads to the  product connecting to inadequate power supply  voltage   current capacity  grounding   and may result in fire or shock   If proper wall outlet is not available  the customer shall ask  qualified electrician for the installation        e Do not use a multiple outlet adapter nor an extension cord in  principle  Use of an adapter or an extension cord could cause  a fire or electrical shock   Contact your authorized service representative if an exten   sion cord is required        e Consult your authorized service representative before con   necting other equipment on the same wall outlet  Overload  could result in a fire     g      2                     A CAUTION    Ignoring this cautions could cause injury or damage to property    gt  Do not ignore this safety advices           Caution Symbol       e The outlet
274. ti tity counter  appears  KSthene soars                    weer    100        Select a user number  Press START to print the counter       Select a tab  and then touch the  button for an available user  number      To immediately display the  desired user  touch  User  Number   and then use the  keypad to type in the user dat OUntSrs  number     The User Reg  screen appears                       User Number    Bree    100        Touch  User Information   User Reg   000 Cance _   The User Info  screen appears        User Information   Network Info             12 46 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode       5 Touch  User Name   User Info     If machine authentication and  account track are synchronized    Account Name  appears in the  User Info screen  Touch  Account  Name   and then specify the  number of the account to be  synchronized  For details on  specifying account numbers   refer to  Specifying account data settings  on page 12 34     User Password       The User Name screen appears     Type in the user name  up to 64  characters long   and then touch       User Name     Enter      The User Info  screen appears again           To cancel changes to the  settings  touch  Cancel                     Alpha    Henery 100                    7 Touch  User Password      The password screen appears     Oe Apa  Menten ioe   characters long   touch  Enter   and    then touch  Enter  in the next screen    that appears        Uti lity Counter             Change Password   
275. ting        Maximum Document  Width     h  Document Size 2    A3 a    A4 U    B4       B50    A4 qa    A5Q    Ba    AS ta       A3 Ga          A4g          B4 aa          B5            Ma    O O O   Oj O    O O O   OjJO       AS         B5 a    O  O  O  O O    O  O  O O O          A5 Gi                                     O  Possible       Not possible       MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     4 Basic copy operation       To copy documents with the    Mixed Original    setting    Y The possible combinations of document sizes differ depending on the  widest document loaded  position of the adjustable document guides of  the ADF     v    Indicates the width of the widest document size of the mixed originals   width of the adjustable document guides of the ADF    v Indicates document sizes that can be specified together with the  maximum document width    1 Slide the adjustable document guides to fit the size of the largest page        Arrange the document pages so that  the side to be copied  first page  t t t  faces up  as shown in the illustration     N    A4             Load the document face up in the  document feed tray    Slide the adjustable document  guides against the edges of the  document     w        Load the document pages into  the ADF so that the top of the  pages is toward the back or the  left side of the machine     Adjustable document guide           If the document is not loaded  correctly  it may not be fed in  straight or a document misfeed or damage to the d
276. tion   Touch the button for a left binding  margin or for a top binding margin   and then touch  Enter          To cancel the Margin setting   touch  OFF         Set the position and the 1                                                 Job List Memory100        4 24    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation 4       4 5 Selecting a Paper setting    The paper size can be selected automatically according to the document  size or it can be specified manually  Specify the paper size according to the  corresponding procedure  depending on the desired copy settings     XQ       Note  The factory default setting is  Auto Paper Select      As a factory default  the  Auto Zoom  setting and the  Auto Paper Select   setting cannot both be selected at the same time  If the  Auto Paper  Select  setting is selected while the  Auto Zoom  setting was selected   the Zoom setting  x1 0  is selected    However  the software switch settings can be used to allow the  Auto  Zoom  setting and the  Auto Paper Select  setting to be selected at the  same time  For details on the software switch settings  refer to     Specifying software switch settings  machine functions   on   page 12 52        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  4 25    4 Basic copy operation       Automatically selecting the paper size     Auto Paper Select    setting     The size of the loaded document is detected  and copies are produced using  paper of the same size     If the  x1 0  Zoom setting was specified  paper of
277. tion for making  copies     The following procedure describes how to copy a single sided document  using basic copy operations     XQ       Note   Some settings cannot be used together    For details on the settings that cannot be combined  refer to  Operations  that cannot be combined  on page 4 6     To make a copy    1  2    Press the  Copy  key to display the Basics screen in Copy mode           Position the document to be copied         For details on positioning the  document  refer to  Feeding the  document  on page 4 9                          MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  4 3    Basic copy operation            a Using the keypad  type in the desired  number of copies     Specify the desired copy settings     The factory default settings for   Basics   Ses3PARe   BYAlt7   application  this machine are listed below  Paper Toon Bing lex  Paper  Auto Paper gute 000   Zoom  x1 000  Full size   Simplex Duplex  1  gt  1  Quality Density  Text   For details on specifying  document settings  refer to   Specifying document settings  on page 4 17    For details on selecting a paper source setting  refer to  Selecting  a Paper setting  on page 4 25    For details on specifying a Zoom setting  refer to  Specifying a  Zoom setting  on page 4 28    For details on selecting a Simplex Duplex setting  refer to   Selecting single  double sided settings for originals and copies   on page 4 40    For details on selecting the quality of the document and the copy  density  refer to  Specif
278. tion user is registered             Note    The user name appears on the button for the registered user number        12 48    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode 12       To manage a user for machine authentication  The settings for registered machine authentication users can be changed  and the counters can be controlled    Display the User Authentication screen for machine authentication         For details on displaying the User Authentication screen  refer to   Specifying user authentication settings  on page 12 42     eee oe ye                   A screen for selecting a user number   Uti tity counter   appears   Registration d   Select the desired user number  Press START to print the counter     User Registration      Select a tab  and then touch the  button for the desired user  number      To immediately display the  desired user  touch  User  Number   and then use the                         keypad to type in the user   counters j   User Nunber I  number Hener 100     The User Information screen appears     Select the desired settings  E           1       Touch  General Settings  to Uti lity Counter am  display the User Registration  Erter    Comter J    screen  and then change the  settings  Password  XXx4x4x4x4  Seca         For details on changing settings Gate   Counter d  bse     for machine authentication users   Hemery 100                User Name   aaa                   refer to  To register a user with  machine authentication  on  page 12 46      
279. ts of the library used  This  can be in the form of a textual message at program startup or in  documentation  online or textual  provided with the package    Redistribution and use in source and binary forms  with or without   modification  are permitted provided that the following conditions are met    1  Redistributions of source code must retain the copyright notice  this list  of conditions and the following disclaimer    2  Redistributions in binary form must reproduce the above copyright  notice  this list of conditions and the following disclaimer in the  documentation and or other materials provided with the distribution    3  All advertising materials mentioning features or use of this software must  display the following acknowledgement     This product includes cryptographic software written by Eric Young   eay crypt soft com     The word    cryptographic    can be left out if the rouines from the library  being used are not cryptographic related    4  If you include any Windows specific code  or a derivative thereof  from  the apps directory  application code  you must include an  acknowledgement     This product includes software written by Tin Hudson   tjn cryptsoft com      THIS SOFTWARE IS PROVIDED BY ERIC YOUNG  AS IS  AND ANY  EXPRESS OR IMPLIED WARRANTIES  INCLUDING  BUT NOT LIMITED TO   THE IMPLIED WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY AND FITNESS FORA  PARTICULAR PURPOSE ARE DISCLAIMED  IN NO EVENT SHALL THE  AUTHOR OR CONTRIBUTORS BE LIABLE FOR ANY DIRECT  INDI
280. tting to adjust the density of the print image to one of nine    levels           Edge Frame Erase       Set this function to erase unwanted areas from the document  such  as the shadows around the edges and the fold              MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     13 5    13    Appendix          Term    Definition       Enhance Security    The various enhanced security features for preventing unauthorized  use of this machine and for increasing security when managing  saved data        Enlarge Display    In this mode  the screens are displayed larger for easier operation                    Erase Set this function to erase the unwanted parts of the document im   age    Finisher This unit sorts and finishes copies that have been fed out    Fold  amp  Staple Set this function to fold the copies in half and staple them together  at the center    Folding Select the folding setting to specify how copies are folded  Depend   ing on the finisher and other options that are installed  the  Crease   and  Center Binding  settings are available    Group Select this setting to separate the copies of each page in the docu     ment  The specified number of copies of the second page is printed  after all copies of the first page are finished   Select this setting to separate copies that are fed out        Image Repeat    Set this function to repeatedly print the image scanned from the doc   ument to fill the entire page       Image Settings    Set the appropriate function to make copies with th
281. ttings  Mode Check   on page 5 3     Enlarging the size of text in touch panel screens    The text and buttons in the touch panel can be displayed in a larger size that  is easier to read  allowing basic copy operations to be easily performed     For details  refer to  Enlarging the touch panel screens  on page 3 21     Interrupting a copy job    The copy job being printed can be interrupted in order for a different copy  job to be printed     For details  refer to  Interrupting a copy job  Interrupt mode   on page 5 8        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Introduction 1       Printing a proof copy    Before printing a large number of copies  a single proof copy can be printed  so that it can be checked     For details  refer to  Printing a sample to check the settings  Proof Copy   on  page 5 6   Saving copy documents    If the optional hard disk drive is installed  the contents of documents can be  saved in boxes     For details  refer to the User manual  Box Operations         MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  1 17    Introduction                                        1 4 Explanation of manual conventions  The marks and text formats used in this manual are described below   Safety advices  Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in  fatal or critical injuries in fact of electrical power    gt  Observe all dangers in order to prevent injuries   Failure to observe instructions highlighted in this manner may result in  serious injuries or property
282. u              Insert the toner hopper until it snaps  into place                    Close the front door        10 6 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers       10          Reminder    When the front door is closed  toner replenishing begins automatically     While the toner is being replenished  do not turn the machine off or open  any door of the machine     Q    Detail    If the print is faint immediately after the toner bottle is replaced  replenish    the toner  For details on replenishing toner  refer to    Toner Supply  on  page 12 24        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  10 7    10    Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers       10 2    Replacing the staple cartridge    When the staple cartridge runs out of eas ae    ple  Cartridge or cancel staple  mode    staples  the message shown below  appears     Example  Message when the finisher has  run out of staples    Q    Detail HenerY 100   Be sure to replace the staple cartridge   only after the message appears  otherwise the machine may be  damaged              2 Staples                 To replace the staple cartridge in finisher       1 Open the front door              2 Push up the staple cartridge holder   and then remove it toward you                    10 8    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Replacing toner bottles and staples and emptying punch waste containers 1 0       3 Press in the area marked  PUSH  to  unloc
283. uch  OFF   Serer    Ll Back Cover   None       Front  Cover        With Image     With Image    Job List Menory100                 Touch the button under  Cover Paper      The Cover Paper screen appears        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Application functions 9          6 Select the paper tray loaded with the ESAE  paper for the cover pages                 Henery 100     7 Touch  Enter   and then touch  Enter  in the next screen that appears   8 Specify any other desired copy settings   9 Using the keypad  type in the desired number of copies     10 Press the  Start  key   Copying begins        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  9 5    Application functions                                        9 2 Inserting cover pages     Insert Sheet    function   Paper  such as colored paper  can be inserted into the copy as an insertion  sheet   Select either  With Image  or  Blank  to specify whether or not a page of the  document is copied onto the insertion sheet   Single sided With the  With Image  With the  Blank   document setting setting  W CH     Double sided  document  SP  S 9 i  Insertion sheet  9 6 MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Application functions       To copy using the    Insert Sheet    function    VY The  Insert Sheet  function can be used only if the ADF is installed     Insert a separator at the desired locations of the insertion sheets  and    then load the document into the ADF           Separator ru       Single sided document Double sided document              
284. urning it on again  and then select the  Overwrite All Data  parameter  again        MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  12 77    12    Utility mode       12 13 Password rules    When  Enhance Security  is set to  ON   the password rules are applied  and  the following limitations are applied to passwords in order to increase    security     Passwords that have already been specified  but do not meet the password  rules when  Enhance Security  is set to  ON  are not accepted when they  are entered  In that case  the administrator should temporarily turn off   Enhance Security   then specify the passwords according to the following    conditions     Q    Detail    As a default  the password rules are disabled     The software switch settings can be used to enable the password rules   For details on the software switch settings  refer to  Specifying software  switch settings  machine functions   on page 12 52     Even if the password rules were disabled with the software switch  settings  they are enabled when  Enhance Security  is set to  ON      Conditions of the password rules       Limitations on the number of  characters    Limitations on registering changing       8 alphanumeric characters   e Only half width characters can  be entered for the administrator  password    e User authentication user pass   words must contain 8 or more  characters     The administrator access code for the administrator  password must meet the password rules    A password that consists of the same l
285. ut of the  output tray  Use when the optional job separator  is installed        10    Copy output tray    Collects printed pages fed out of the copier fac   ing down       11    Front door    Opened when replacing the toner bottle  See  page 10 3        12    1st tray    Can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of paper  The paper size can be adjusted freely   See  page 3 54        13    2nd tray    Can be loaded with up to 500 sheets of paper  The paper size can be adjusted freely   See  page 3 54        14          Paper empty indicator       As the amount of paper in the paper tray de   creases  the area that appears in red increases              MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     3 7    Before making copies       Inside back of main unit                                                                                                   The illustration above shows the main unit with the optional original cover  and ADF installed                                No  Part name Description   1 Document pad Presses down on the document positioned on  the original glass   2 Original glass Scans the image of the loaded document  See  page 4 11    3 Switchback unit Built into the printer to turn over the paper dur   ing double sided printing   4 Automatic duplex unit Turns over the paper for double sided printing   5 Right side door Open when clearing paper misfeeds in the right   side door unit or the fusing unit   6 Toner hopper Used when installing and replacing the toner  bottles   7 
286. utput    There are streaks in the  printed output     Is the original glass dirty     Wipe the glass with a soft   dry cloth   See page 11 3         Is the document transfer  belt dirty     Clean the document transfer  belt with a soft cloth damp   ened with a mild detergent           Was the original docu   ment printed on highly  translucent material   such as diazo photosen   sitive paper or overhead  projector transparen   cies        Place a blank sheet of paper  on top of the document    page 4 11            6 28    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5        Troubleshooting          Symptom    Possible cause    Remedy          Is a double sided docu   ment being copied     If a thin double sided docu   ment is being copied  the  print on the back side may  be reproduced in the copy   Select the  Dot Matrix  Den   sity setting   See page 4 43         The image is not aligned  properly on the paper     Is the document incor   rectly positioned     Correctly position the docu   ment against the document  scales   See page 4 11    Load the document into the  ADF  and slide the adjusta   ble document guides to fit  the size of the document    See page 4 9         Is the document incor   rectly positioned in the  ADF     If the document cannot be  fed correctly through the  ADF  make copies by posi   tioning the document on the  original glass   See   page 4 11         Is the original glass dirty   while using the ADF      Wipe the glass with a soft   dry cloth   See page 11 3      
287. various settings by directly touching  the panel    2  Access  key If user authentication or account track settings  have been applied  press this key after entering  the user name and password  for user authenti   cation  or the account name and password  for  account track  in order to use this machine    3  Box  key Press to enter Box mode    While the machine is in Box mode  the indicator  on the  Box  key lights up in green  For details   refer to the User manual  Box Operations     4  Extra Scan  key Press to enter Extra Scan mode    While the machine is in Extra Scan mode  the in   dicator on the  Extra Scan  key lights up in  green    For details  refer to the User manual  Network  Scanner Operations  and the User manual  Ad   vanced Scan Operations     5  Fax Scan  key Press to enter Fax Scan mode    While the machine is in Fax Scan mode  the in   dicator on the  Fax Scan  key lights up in green   For details  refer to the User manual  Facsimile  Operations  and the User manual  Advanced  Scan Operations     6  Copy  key Press to enter Copy mode   As a default  the  machine is in Copy mode   While the machine is  in Copy mode  the indicator on the  Copy  key  lights up in green           MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Before making copies          No  Part name    Description       7  Reset  key    Press to clear all settings  except programmed  settings  entered in the control panel and touch  panel        8  Interrupt  key    Press to enter Interrupt mode  While 
288. vided  in the message so that the   Enhance Security  parameter can be used    The message  To enable the Encryption setting turn off the power   switch and after a while turn it on  Please format HDD after turning on   the power switch   appears                    Enhance    Securit  cancel    Enter Ju                 Turn the machine off with the main power switch  and then wait about  10 seconds before turning it on again         The  Enhance Security  parameter should be turned off by the  administrator  Select  OFF  in the Enhance Security screen  touch   Enter   and then perform the operation described in step 4        12 72    MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Utility mode    Q    Detail    When    Enhance Security  is set to  ON   a password that does not meet    the password rules cannot be used  For details  refer to  Password rules   on page 12 78        When    Enhance Security  is set to  ON   the software switch settings  cannot be changed  In addition  the parameters that are changed when     Enhance Security  is set to  ON  do not return to their original settings   even after  Enhance Security  is set to  OFF         MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  12 73    12 Utility mode       Canceling an access lock     Unlock    parameter     Operations that the access lock is applied to are locked so that the password  cannot be entered after it has been incorrectly entered three consecutive  times  Restart the machine or  if the penalty is canceled  the password is no  lo
289. word will be invalid when it is en   tered in the Administrator Management screen        HDD Management   HDD Lock Setting If the optional hard disk drive is installed  a 20 digit  hard disk locking password will be specified        Encryption Settings If security kit SC 504 is installed  encryption is spec   ified  Either a locking password or encryption must  be specified                 XQ       Note   HDD Management  appears in the Administrator Management screen  only when the optional hard disk drive is installed     Certain conditions must be met  for example  an SSL certificate must be  registered  service codes must be changed and CS remote care must be  canceled  in order for the enhanced security features to be applied  For  details on registering an SSL certificate  refer to the User manual   Network Scanner Operations   For details on changing service codes  and canceling CS remote care  contact your technical representative     Q    Detail  For details on the password rules  refer to  Password rules  on  page 12 78     To cancel encryption settings  set  Enhance Security  to  OFF   erase all  data from the memory  and then turn the machine off  then on again with  the main power switch to initialize it  For details on managing the hard  disk  refer to the User manual  Box Operations         MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5  12 69    Utility mode       Parameters that are changed when    Enhance Security    is set    When  Enhance Security  is set to  ON   settings f
290. ximum A3  11 x 17   Weight  Maximum 210 g m1  ADF   2 kg  three dimensional  objects        Paper types    Plain paper  56 to 90 g m    thick paper   90 to 210 g m     thin paper   50 to 55 g m     special paper  overhead projector transparencies   post   cards   envelopes     label sheets     Can only be fed through the bypass tray       Copy sizes    1st and 2nd tray    A3 Ga  B4     A4 Ga   B5 Ga y  A5     Foolscap  11 x 17     11  x 14 Ga  Legal     Letter Ga q    Bypass tray    A3 Ga  B4 Ga  A4 Ga   BS Ga   A5 Ga y  B6 Ga  Foolscap  11 x  17 a  11 x 14 Ga  Legal   Width  90 to 297 mm  Length  140 to 432 mm       Paper tray capacity    1st tray    Plain paper  500 sheets   2nd tray    Plain paper  500 sheets   Bypass tray    Plain paper  150 sheets  Thick paper  50 sheets  Overhead  projector transparencies postcards label sheets  50 sheets   Envelopes  10  Thin paper  150 sheets       Copy output tray capacity          Plain paper  250 sheets  Thick paper  Overhead projector  transparencies   20 sheets          MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     7 3       Specifications          Specifications       Warm up time    Less than 24 seconds after the machine is turned on with the  main power switch  less than 26 seconds if the fax kit or scan   ner kit is installed    Less than 14 seconds after the  Power   auxiliary power  key   is turned on    At room temperature  23  C  73 4  F               Image loss Leading edge  4 mm  Trailing edge  4 mm   Rear edge  4 mm  Front edge  4 
291. ying document quality density settings  on  page 4 43    For details on specifying combined copy settings  refer to   Selecting a Combine Originals setting  on page 4 46    For details on specifying Finishing settings  refer to  Selecting  finishing for copies  on page 4 50    For details on selecting the binding setting  refer to  Creating  booklet copies     Booklet    function   on page 9 22    For details on specifying settings for the Application functions  refer  to  Application functions  on page 9 3     Fein     tan    Mixed _     Finishing 4   Original      Job List emery 100          If the number of copies was  incorrectly entered  press the  C    clear  key in the keypad  and  then specify the correct number  of copies     O00  POO              3                MP 1025 1020 1035  Phase 2 5     Basic copy operation 4       Press the  Start  key         To stop the copy operation being  performed  press the  Stop  key   For details  refer to   Stopping deleting a job  on  page 4 63        The next copy operation can be  queued while a copy operation is                being performed  For details   refer to  Scanning the next document during printing  reserving a  copy job   on page 4 62     eee    Note   If the optional hard disk drive is installed   Save in User Box  appears in  the Copy mode screen  If copies are made with  Save in User Box   selected  the contents of the copied documents are saved in boxes     For details on boxes  refer to the User manual  Box O
    
Download Pdf Manuals
 
 
    
Related Search
    
Related Contents
User`s Manual (SW 3.5)  Manual do usuário  Handbuch - Trio Solar  HP B.06.X User's Manual    Copyright © All rights reserved. 
   Failed to retrieve file